1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \default_output_format pdf2
74 \bibtex_command bibtex
75 \index_command default
79 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
80 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
84 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
85 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
86 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
91 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
92 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
95 \use_package amsmath 1
96 \use_package amssymb 1
99 \use_package mathdots 1
100 \use_package mathtools 0
101 \use_package mhchem 1
102 \use_package stackrel 0
103 \use_package stmaryrd 0
104 \use_package undertilde 0
106 \cite_engine_type default
110 \paperorientation portrait
114 \notefontcolor #0000ff
131 \paragraph_separation skip
133 \quotes_language english
136 \paperpagestyle default
137 \tracking_changes true
138 \output_changes false
142 \author 1414654397 "Richard Heck"
153 by the \SpecialChar LyX
158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
160 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
161 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
162 Documentation mailing list:
163 \begin_inset CommandInset href
165 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
176 \begin_inset Newline newline
180 \begin_inset Newline newline
184 \begin_inset Note Note
187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
188 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
189 \begin_inset Newline newline
194 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
195 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
203 \begin_layout Standard
204 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
205 LatexCommand tableofcontents
212 \begin_layout Chapter
216 \begin_layout Section
217 What is \SpecialChar LyX
221 \begin_layout Standard
223 is a document preparation system.
224 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
225 scripts, publishable books, business
226 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
227 It is unlike most other
228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
235 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
237 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
250 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
253 pt type, left justified, 5
254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
263 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
267 \begin_layout Standard
268 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
273 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
277 \begin_layout Standard
282 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
283 's philosophy: most importantly,
284 the format of all of the manuals.
285 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
286 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
292 manual describes that, too.
295 \begin_layout Section
300 \begin_layout Standard
301 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
302 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
304 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
305 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
309 \begin_layout Standard
310 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
311 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
312 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
314 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
315 only a vertical scrollbar.
316 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
317 The first case is large images.
318 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
319 image and use the option
330 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
333 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
334 this doesn't work for equations yet.
337 \begin_layout Standard
338 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
339 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
347 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
354 \begin_layout Section
358 \begin_layout Standard
359 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
361 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
363 Just select the manual you want to read from the
370 \begin_layout Section
371 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
373 \begin_inset CommandInset label
375 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
382 \begin_layout Standard
383 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
384 can be configured via the menu
386 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
390 \begin_inset Index idx
393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
400 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
402 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
403 packages are available.
404 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
406 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
408 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
409 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
413 \begin_inset space \space{}
416 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
417 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
419 To force \SpecialChar LyX
420 to re-inspect your system, you should use
422 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
426 \begin_inset Index idx
429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
430 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
436 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
437 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
440 \begin_layout Section
443 \begin_inset CommandInset label
445 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
452 \begin_layout Standard
453 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
454 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
455 installed, but you will not be
456 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
457 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
458 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
459 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
460 document can always be output as plain text
464 \begin_layout Standard
465 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
466 or DocBook classes or packages.
467 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
468 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
471 \begin_layout Standard
472 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
473 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
474 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
477 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
485 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
486 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
489 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
493 \begin_inset Index idx
496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
497 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
505 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
512 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
516 \begin_layout Chapter
517 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
521 \begin_layout Section
522 Basic File Operations
523 \begin_inset Index idx
526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
535 \begin_layout Standard
540 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
541 in addition to some more advanced operations:
544 \begin_layout Itemize
566 \begin_layout Itemize
582 arg "buffer-new-template"
588 \begin_layout Itemize
610 \begin_layout Itemize
620 \begin_layout Itemize
634 \begin_layout Itemize
656 \begin_layout Itemize
668 arg "buffer-write-as"
674 \begin_layout Itemize
688 \begin_layout Itemize
702 \begin_layout Standard
703 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
704 a few minor differences.
707 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
718 command lists the available templates.
719 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
720 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
721 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
729 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
736 \begin_layout Standard
737 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
769 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
770 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
771 is just that — a big, blank space.
779 \begin_layout Standard
800 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
805 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
808 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
826 will reload the document from disk.
827 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
828 and want to restore it to the last save.
837 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
838 them as your changes.
841 \begin_layout Section
842 Basic Editing Features
843 \begin_inset Index idx
846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
853 \begin_inset CommandInset label
855 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
862 \begin_layout Standard
863 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
864 can perform cut and paste operations
865 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
866 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
867 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
868 editing features and how to access
870 We will start with cut and paste.
873 \begin_layout Standard
874 As you might expect, the
878 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
879 various other editing features.
880 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
884 \begin_layout Itemize
890 \begin_inset Index idx
893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
922 \begin_layout Itemize
928 \begin_inset Index idx
931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
960 \begin_layout Itemize
966 \begin_inset Index idx
969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
994 \begin_layout Itemize
1004 \begin_layout Itemize
1008 \begin_inset space ~
1014 \begin_layout Itemize
1018 \begin_inset space ~
1022 \begin_inset space ~
1028 \begin_inset Index idx
1031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1040 \begin_inset Index idx
1043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1058 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1068 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1074 \begin_layout Standard
1075 The first three are self-explanatory.
1076 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1077 and other programs by
1098 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1099 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1104 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1105 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1106 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1107 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1108 into individual cells.
1112 \begin_inset space ~
1117 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1118 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1122 \begin_layout Standard
1126 \begin_inset space ~
1131 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1133 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1135 \begin_inset space ~
1142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1148 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1149 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1150 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1152 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1156 \begin_inset space \space{}
1159 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1160 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1163 \begin_inset space ~
1166 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1168 \begin_inset space ~
1172 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1176 \begin_inset space ~
1185 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1186 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1188 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1192 \begin_inset space ~
1197 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1198 start a new paragraph.
1199 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1200 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1205 \begin_inset space ~
1208 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1210 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1214 \begin_inset space ~
1222 \begin_inset space ~
1225 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1228 paste from the primary selection.
1229 This is normally the currently selected text.
1232 \begin_layout Standard
1235 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1237 \begin_inset space ~
1241 \begin_inset space ~
1249 \begin_inset space ~
1253 \begin_inset space ~
1259 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1265 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1268 \begin_inset space ~
1277 \begin_inset space ~
1282 button to skip the current word.
1286 \begin_inset space ~
1291 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1295 \begin_inset space ~
1300 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1302 If the toggle is set, searching for
1303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1314 will not match the word
1315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1329 Match whole words only
1331 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1332 to only find complete words, e.
1333 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1362 offers also an advanced
1365 \begin_inset space ~
1369 \begin_inset space ~
1374 feature that is described in section
1375 \begin_inset space ~
1379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1381 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1388 \begin_layout Standard
1389 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1390 \begin_inset space \space{}
1394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1402 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1404 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1409 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1416 \begin_layout Standard
1420 arg "inset-select-all"
1423 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1424 When the cursor is inside an inset
1427 arg "inset-select-all"
1430 selects the content of the inset.
1434 arg "inset-select-all"
1437 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1442 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1445 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1449 \begin_layout Section
1451 \begin_inset Index idx
1454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1461 \begin_inset Index idx
1464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1471 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1473 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1480 \begin_layout Standard
1481 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1483 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1486 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1489 or the toolbar button
1495 to undo some mistake.
1496 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1498 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1501 or the toolbar button
1508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1515 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1516 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1519 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1522 \begin_layout Standard
1523 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1532 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1533 This is a consequence of the 100
1534 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1537 step undo limit mentioned above.
1540 \begin_layout Standard
1549 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1551 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1555 \begin_layout Section
1557 \begin_inset Index idx
1560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1569 \begin_layout Standard
1570 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1573 \begin_layout Enumerate
1578 \begin_layout Itemize
1583 once anywhere in the edit window.
1584 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1588 \begin_layout Enumerate
1593 \begin_layout Itemize
1600 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1603 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1606 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1607 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1610 \begin_layout Itemize
1611 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1614 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1621 \begin_layout Enumerate
1622 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1626 \begin_layout Standard
1627 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1628 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1632 \begin_layout Section
1634 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1636 name "sec:Navigating"
1641 \begin_inset Index idx
1644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1653 \begin_layout Standard
1655 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1658 \begin_layout Itemize
1663 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1664 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1667 \begin_layout Itemize
1668 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1670 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1672 \begin_inset space ~
1677 or by the toolbar button
1680 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1686 \begin_layout Itemize
1687 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1689 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1692 and use the same menu to return to them.
1693 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1696 \begin_layout Standard
1700 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1705 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1706 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1708 \begin_inset space ~
1713 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1714 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1715 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1716 your last editing position.
1719 \begin_layout Standard
1724 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1728 \begin_layout Subsection
1730 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1732 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1737 \begin_inset Index idx
1740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1741 Navigating ! Outline
1747 \begin_inset Index idx
1750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1759 \begin_layout Standard
1760 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1761 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1762 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1764 \begin_inset space ~
1768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1770 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1774 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1775 \begin_inset space ~
1779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1781 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1786 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1790 \begin_layout Standard
1791 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1792 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1793 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1794 dialog and to modify the citation.
1797 \begin_layout Standard
1798 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1800 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1801 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1809 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1812 \begin_layout Standard
1813 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1814 you further to control the display.
1819 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1820 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1826 option keeps it in the current view state.
1827 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1828 \begin_inset space ~
1831 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1832 \begin_inset space ~
1835 3, the subsections of sections
1836 \begin_inset space ~
1839 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1844 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1845 \begin_inset space ~
1849 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1859 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1862 \begin_layout Standard
1869 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1870 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1884 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1885 So, for example, you can move section
1886 \begin_inset space ~
1890 \begin_inset space ~
1893 2.4 or after section
1894 \begin_inset space ~
1899 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1912 (or the corresponding key bindings
1920 ) you can change the level of sections.
1921 So you can for example make section
1922 \begin_inset space ~
1926 \begin_inset space ~
1930 \begin_inset space ~
1936 \begin_layout Subsection
1937 Horizontal Scrolling
1938 \begin_inset Index idx
1941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1942 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1950 \begin_layout Standard
1952 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1954 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1958 \begin_inset space \space{}
1962 \begin_inset space ~
1965 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1966 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1967 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1971 \begin_layout Standard
1972 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1976 \begin_layout Itemize
1978 is used on a small tablet computer
1981 \begin_layout Itemize
1982 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
1986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1994 \begin_inset space ~
2007 \begin_layout Itemize
2008 Math constructs with long command names
2011 \begin_layout Standard
2012 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2013 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2015 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2016 windows so that table
2017 \begin_inset space ~
2021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2023 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2028 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2030 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2031 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2034 \begin_layout Standard
2035 \begin_inset Float table
2041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2042 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2045 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2047 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2051 Horizontal scrolling test.
2059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2061 \begin_inset Tabular
2062 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2063 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2064 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2065 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2066 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2108 \begin_layout Section
2109 Input/Word Completion
2110 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2112 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2117 \begin_inset Index idx
2120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2127 \begin_inset Index idx
2130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2161 \begin_layout Standard
2163 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2165 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2166 is used to propose completions.
2169 \begin_layout Standard
2170 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2173 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2178 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2185 \begin_inset space ~
2189 \begin_inset space ~
2194 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2198 \begin_inset space ~
2203 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2204 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2208 \begin_inset space ~
2214 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2215 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2216 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2217 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2220 \begin_layout Standard
2222 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2223 completions available.
2228 key to accept a proposed completion.
2229 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2230 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2231 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2238 \begin_layout Standard
2239 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2240 ing options for text.
2241 The special math option
2245 enables characters to be composed.
2246 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2247 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2250 , you can then input the characters
2251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2262 to a formula to get it.
2263 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2264 of the math toolbar.
2265 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2269 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2270 's installation folder.
2271 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2280 \begin_layout Section
2282 \begin_inset Index idx
2285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2292 \begin_inset Index idx
2295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2324 \begin_inset Index idx
2327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2358 \begin_layout Standard
2359 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2373 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2376 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2380 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2381 \begin_inset space ~
2385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2387 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2394 \begin_layout Standard
2398 \begin_inset space ~
2406 \begin_inset space ~
2427 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2431 \begin_layout Labeling
2432 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2436 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2437 LatexCommand nomenclature
2439 description "Tabulator key"
2445 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2447 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2448 \begin_inset space ~
2452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2454 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2461 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2465 , especially section
2466 \begin_inset space ~
2470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2472 reference "subsec:Lists"
2478 If you are still confused, look in the
2483 \begin_inset Newline newline
2491 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2492 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2496 \begin_layout Labeling
2497 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2501 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2502 LatexCommand nomenclature
2504 description "Escape key"
2511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2518 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2519 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2522 \begin_layout Labeling
2523 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2529 \begin_inset space ~
2533 \begin_inset space ~
2540 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2541 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2545 \begin_layout Standard
2546 There are three modifier keys:
2549 \begin_layout Labeling
2550 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2568 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2569 LatexCommand nomenclature
2571 description "Control key"
2575 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2576 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2580 \begin_layout Itemize
2589 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2592 \begin_layout Itemize
2601 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2604 \begin_layout Itemize
2613 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2617 \begin_layout Labeling
2618 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2636 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2637 LatexCommand nomenclature
2639 description "Shift key"
2643 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2644 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2647 \begin_layout Labeling
2648 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2666 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2667 LatexCommand nomenclature
2669 description "Alt or Meta key"
2673 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2674 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2675 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2681 \begin_inset Newline newline
2684 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2686 menu accelerator keys
2689 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2690 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2694 \begin_layout Standard
2695 For example, the sequence
2696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2702 \begin_inset space ~
2706 \begin_inset space ~
2712 \begin_inset space ~
2720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2739 \begin_inset space ~
2745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2755 \begin_layout Standard
2760 manual lists all other things bound to the
2768 \begin_layout Standard
2769 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2771 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2772 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2773 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2774 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2775 The \SpecialChar LyX
2776 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2777 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2778 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2780 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2796 followed by a capital
2803 \begin_layout Chapter
2806 \begin_inset Index idx
2809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2819 \begin_layout Section
2821 \begin_inset Index idx
2824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2833 \begin_layout Subsection
2837 \begin_layout Standard
2838 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2839 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2840 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2841 numbering schemes, and so on.
2842 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2843 and format the title of your document differently.
2846 \begin_layout Standard
2851 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2852 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2853 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2854 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2855 picks one for you by default.
2856 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2859 \begin_layout Subsection
2861 \begin_inset Index idx
2864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2871 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2873 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2880 \begin_layout Standard
2881 You can select a class using the
2883 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2884 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2888 \begin_inset Index idx
2891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2898 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2902 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2906 \begin_layout Standard
2907 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2912 \begin_layout Description
2913 Article for basic articles
2916 \begin_layout Description
2917 Report for basic reports
2920 \begin_layout Description
2921 Book for writing a book
2924 \begin_layout Description
2925 Letter for US-style letters
2928 \begin_layout Standard
2929 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2930 only uses if you have installed
2931 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2932 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2933 distributions will include
2935 Here are some of the classes.
2936 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2938 Special Document Classes
2947 \begin_layout Description
2948 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2951 \begin_layout Description
2952 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2956 \begin_layout Description
2957 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2961 \begin_layout Description
2962 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2963 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2964 There are three article layouts available.
2965 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2966 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2967 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2968 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2973 sequential numbering
2974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2977 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2978 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2979 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2980 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2983 \begin_layout Description
2984 Beamer Layout for presentations
2987 \begin_layout Description
2988 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2989 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2990 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2991 with \SpecialChar LyX
2995 \begin_layout Description
2996 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2999 \begin_layout Description
3001 \begin_inset space ~
3004 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3007 \begin_layout Description
3008 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3011 \begin_layout Description
3012 Foils Used to make transparencies
3015 \begin_layout Description
3016 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3017 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3018 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3019 with \SpecialChar LyX
3023 \begin_layout Description
3024 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3025 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3028 \begin_layout Description
3029 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3032 \begin_layout Description
3033 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3036 \begin_layout Description
3037 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3038 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3039 (Is used by this document.)
3042 \begin_layout Description
3043 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3046 \begin_layout Description
3047 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3050 \begin_layout Description
3055 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3056 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3058 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3062 \begin_layout Description
3063 Slides Used to make transparencies
3066 \begin_layout Description
3068 \begin_inset space ~
3071 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3072 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3075 \begin_layout Description
3076 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3079 \begin_layout Standard
3080 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3082 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3084 Special Document Classes
3091 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3092 of the document classes.
3095 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3099 \begin_layout Standard
3100 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3102 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3103 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3105 \begin_inset Index idx
3108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3125 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3126 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3128 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3131 \begin_layout Standard
3134 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3139 , are highly specialized.
3141 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3142 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3143 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3144 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3145 by some document class.
3146 There are just too many of them.
3147 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3150 \begin_layout Standard
3151 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3159 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3160 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3161 document class for a new file.
3163 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3166 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3173 manual for information on how to install them.
3174 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3180 \begin_layout Standard
3181 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3182 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3183 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3184 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3185 class files to be used for dissertation
3186 s submitted to those universities.
3187 The \SpecialChar LyX
3188 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3190 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3194 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3200 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3203 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3207 name "subsec:Modules"
3212 \begin_inset Index idx
3215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3224 \begin_layout Standard
3225 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3226 chosen document class.
3227 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3228 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3235 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3239 \begin_inset Index idx
3242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3249 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3253 \begin_layout Standard
3254 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3255 packages or file format converters that are not always
3256 installed by default.
3258 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3259 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3260 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3261 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3263 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3264 file without the missing prerequisites.
3265 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3266 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3269 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3273 \begin_inset Index idx
3276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3277 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3283 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3288 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3291 \begin_layout Standard
3292 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3300 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3302 will advise you about these things.
3310 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3312 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3314 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3319 \begin_inset Index idx
3322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3323 Document ! Local Layout
3331 \begin_layout Standard
3332 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3333 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3334 : They are intended to be used in
3335 a variety of different documents.
3336 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3337 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3338 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3339 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3340 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3342 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3360 manual for information on how to use it.
3363 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3367 \begin_layout Standard
3368 Each class has a default set of options.
3369 Here's a quick table describing them:
3372 \begin_layout Standard
3373 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3379 \begin_layout Standard
3381 \begin_inset Tabular
3382 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3383 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3384 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3385 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3386 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3387 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3388 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3842 \begin_layout Standard
3843 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3849 \begin_layout Standard
3850 You're probably also wondering what
3851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3855 \begin_inset space ~
3859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3863 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3864 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3869 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3874 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3884 headings, there are also
3892 headings, and so on.
3893 We will describe these headings fully in section
3894 \begin_inset space ~
3898 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3900 reference "subsec:Headings"
3907 \begin_layout Subsection
3909 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3911 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3916 \begin_inset Index idx
3919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3926 \begin_inset Index idx
3929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3938 \begin_layout Standard
3939 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3941 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3948 \begin_inset space ~
3956 \begin_inset space ~
3961 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3963 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3964 doesn't support special options you want to
3965 use for your document.
3966 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3967 -class and its options, you have to read
3971 \begin_layout Standard
3975 \begin_inset space ~
3982 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3988 \begin_inset space ~
3993 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3994 You can choose between the following five options:
3997 \begin_layout Labeling
3998 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4003 Use default page style of current class.
4006 \begin_layout Labeling
4007 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4012 No page numbers or headings.
4015 \begin_layout Labeling
4016 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4024 \begin_layout Labeling
4025 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4030 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4031 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4032 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4033 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4036 \begin_layout Labeling
4037 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4042 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4043 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4049 \begin_inset Index idx
4052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4054 -packages ! fancyhdr
4060 How they are defined is explained in section
4061 \begin_inset space ~
4065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4067 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4074 \begin_layout Standard
4075 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4076 \begin_inset space ~
4080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4082 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4089 \begin_layout Subsection
4090 Paper Size and Orientation
4091 \begin_inset Index idx
4094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4095 Document ! Paper size
4101 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4103 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4110 \begin_layout Standard
4111 You can find the following options in the menu
4114 \begin_inset space ~
4121 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4125 \begin_inset Index idx
4128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4137 \begin_layout Labeling
4138 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4142 \begin_inset space ~
4147 What size paper to print on.
4152 \begin_layout Itemize
4158 \begin_layout Itemize
4164 \begin_layout Itemize
4170 \begin_layout Itemize
4176 \begin_layout Itemize
4179 US letter, US legal, US executive
4182 \begin_layout Itemize
4188 \begin_layout Itemize
4195 \begin_layout Labeling
4196 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4201 To choose whether to output as
4212 \begin_layout Labeling
4213 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4217 \begin_inset space ~
4222 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4223 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4226 \begin_layout Subsection
4228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4230 name "subsec:Margins"
4235 \begin_inset Index idx
4238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4245 \begin_inset Index idx
4248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4257 \begin_layout Standard
4258 Paper margins are set in the menu
4260 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4264 \begin_inset Index idx
4267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4276 \begin_layout Standard
4277 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4278 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4279 the paper format and the font size into account.
4282 \begin_layout Subsection
4286 \begin_layout Standard
4287 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4293 That includes the paragraph environments.
4294 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4295 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4296 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4298 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4307 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4309 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4310 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4311 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4314 \begin_layout Section
4315 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4316 \begin_inset Index idx
4319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4320 Paragraph ! Indentation
4328 \begin_layout Subsection
4330 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4332 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4339 \begin_layout Standard
4340 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4341 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4344 \begin_layout Standard
4345 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4346 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4347 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4348 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4352 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4358 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4359 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4360 language than English.
4362 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4365 \begin_layout Standard
4366 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4367 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4368 into \SpecialChar LyX
4370 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4373 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4375 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4376 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4377 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4384 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4385 goes to produce a printable file.
4390 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4392 gives you the ability globally to change
4396 these pre-coded spacings.
4397 We will explain more later.
4400 \begin_layout Subsection
4401 Paragraph Separation
4402 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4404 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4409 \begin_inset Index idx
4412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4413 Paragraph ! Separation
4421 \begin_layout Standard
4429 \begin_inset space ~
4437 \begin_inset space ~
4444 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4448 \begin_inset Index idx
4451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4457 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4460 \begin_layout Subsection
4464 \begin_layout Standard
4465 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4468 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4470 \begin_inset space ~
4475 dialog and toggle the
4478 \begin_inset space ~
4483 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4486 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4490 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4491 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4495 \begin_layout Standard
4496 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4497 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4500 \begin_layout Subsection
4502 \begin_inset Index idx
4505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4506 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4514 \begin_layout Standard
4517 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4521 \begin_inset Index idx
4524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4533 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4537 \begin_inset space ~
4546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4547 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4553 \begin_inset Index idx
4556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4558 -packages ! setspace
4563 installed to use this feature.
4568 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4570 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4572 \begin_inset space ~
4577 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4578 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4581 \begin_layout Section
4582 Paragraph Environments
4583 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4585 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4590 \begin_inset Index idx
4593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4594 Paragraph ! Environments
4600 \begin_inset Index idx
4603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4604 Paragraph environments|(
4612 \begin_layout Subsection
4616 \begin_layout Standard
4617 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4620 \begin_layout Standard
4629 } \SpecialChar ldots
4639 \begin_inset Newline newline
4642 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4644 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4645 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4646 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4655 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4658 \begin_layout Standard
4659 A paragraph environment is simply a
4660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4667 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4668 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4669 scheme, labels, and so on.
4670 Additionally, you can
4671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4678 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4679 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4680 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4681 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4683 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4685 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4688 \begin_layout Standard
4689 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4690 \begin_inset Graphics
4691 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4697 at the left end of the toolbar.
4699 will change the environment of the
4703 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4704 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4705 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4709 \begin_layout Standard
4718 create a new paragraph using the
4722 paragraph environment.
4724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4731 because if you are in one of these environments:
4734 \begin_layout Itemize
4740 \begin_layout Itemize
4746 \begin_layout Itemize
4752 \begin_layout Itemize
4758 \begin_layout Itemize
4764 \begin_layout Itemize
4770 \begin_layout Itemize
4776 \begin_layout Standard
4778 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4782 , rather than resetting it to
4787 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4788 \begin_inset space ~
4792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4794 reference "sec:Nesting"
4801 \begin_layout Subsection
4805 \begin_layout Standard
4806 The default paragraph environment is
4811 It creates a plain paragraph.
4813 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4814 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4815 this manual) are in the
4822 \begin_layout Standard
4823 You can nest a paragraph using the
4827 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4835 \begin_layout Subsection
4837 \begin_inset Index idx
4840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4849 \begin_layout Standard
4850 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4851 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4860 for thanks or contact information.
4861 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4862 places all of this on a separate page
4863 along with today's date.
4864 For other types of documents, the title
4865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4872 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4876 \begin_layout Standard
4878 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4892 Here's how you use them:
4895 \begin_layout Itemize
4896 Put the title of your document in the
4903 \begin_layout Itemize
4904 Put the author name in the
4911 \begin_layout Itemize
4912 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4913 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4919 Note that using this environment is optional.
4920 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4921 will automatically insert today's date.
4922 If you don't want a date, use the option
4924 Suppress default date on front page
4928 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4929 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4931 \begin_inset space ~
4939 \begin_layout Standard
4940 You can use footnotes to insert
4941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4948 or contact information.
4951 \begin_layout Subsection
4953 \begin_inset Index idx
4956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4963 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4965 name "subsec:Headings"
4972 \begin_layout Standard
4973 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4975 takes care of the numbering for you.
4978 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4980 \begin_inset Index idx
4983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4984 Section headings ! Numbered
4992 \begin_layout Standard
4993 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4997 \begin_layout Enumerate
5003 \begin_layout Enumerate
5009 \begin_layout Enumerate
5015 \begin_layout Enumerate
5021 \begin_layout Enumerate
5027 \begin_layout Enumerate
5033 \begin_layout Enumerate
5039 \begin_layout Standard
5041 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5042 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5043 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5046 \begin_layout Standard
5047 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5048 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5049 You group the book into chapters.
5051 does a similar grouping:
5054 \begin_layout Itemize
5059 is divided into either
5070 \begin_layout Itemize
5082 \begin_layout Itemize
5094 \begin_layout Itemize
5106 \begin_layout Itemize
5118 \begin_layout Itemize
5130 \begin_layout Standard
5131 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5139 Not all document types use the
5143 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5148 is the top-level heading.
5156 \begin_layout Standard
5161 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5162 labels it with its number,
5163 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5165 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5177 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5179 \begin_inset Index idx
5182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5183 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5191 \begin_layout Standard
5192 The unnumbered section headings have a
5193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5200 at the end of their name.
5201 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5202 the table of contents, see section
5203 \begin_inset space ~
5207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5216 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5217 Changing the Numbering
5218 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5220 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5227 \begin_layout Standard
5228 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5229 in the Table of Contents.
5230 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5232 Just as certain classes start with
5246 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5256 This is something you can change.
5259 \begin_layout Standard
5262 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5266 \begin_inset Index idx
5269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5278 \begin_inset space ~
5282 \begin_inset space ~
5287 you will see two counters.
5292 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5293 numbers a section heading.
5294 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5298 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5299 Short Titles of Headings
5300 \begin_inset Index idx
5303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5304 Section headings ! Short titles
5310 \begin_inset Argument 1
5313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5320 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5322 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5329 \begin_layout Standard
5330 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5331 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5332 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5333 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5336 \begin_layout Standard
5338 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5339 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5340 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5341 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5344 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5346 \begin_inset space ~
5352 This will insert a box labeled
5353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5357 \begin_inset space ~
5361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5364 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5365 This also works for captions inside floats.
5366 There can only be one short title per title.
5369 \begin_layout Standard
5370 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5373 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5377 \begin_layout Standard
5378 The following information applies to all section headings:
5381 \begin_layout Itemize
5382 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5385 \begin_layout Itemize
5386 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5389 \begin_layout Itemize
5390 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5393 \begin_layout Itemize
5394 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5397 \begin_layout Subsection
5401 \begin_layout Standard
5403 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5417 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5418 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5419 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5420 the text they contain.
5421 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5429 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5432 \begin_layout Standard
5433 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5442 when you start a new paragraph.
5443 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5447 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5448 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5449 have to change back to the
5453 environment yourself.
5456 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5465 \begin_inset Index idx
5468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5477 \begin_layout Standard
5478 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5479 time for the differences.
5488 are identical except for one difference:
5492 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5501 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5504 \begin_layout Standard
5505 Here's an example of the
5518 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5520 See – no indentation!
5524 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5525 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5526 the other paragraph.
5529 \begin_layout Standard
5530 Here's another example, this time in the
5537 \begin_layout Quotation
5543 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5544 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5545 the first line, then
5549 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5553 you were quoting other text.
5556 \begin_layout Quotation
5557 Here's a new paragraph.
5558 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5559 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5562 \begin_layout Standard
5563 As the examples show,
5567 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5568 They should put quotes in the
5573 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5577 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5580 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5582 \begin_inset Index idx
5585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5592 \begin_inset Index idx
5595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5602 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5611 \begin_layout Standard
5616 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5622 \begin_inset Newline newline
5625 Which I did not rehearse!
5629 It could be much worse.
5630 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5632 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5633 indented a bit more than the first.
5634 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5640 \begin_inset Newline newline
5643 And make things look fine
5644 \begin_inset Newline newline
5650 arg "newline-insert newline"
5656 \begin_layout Standard
5661 does not indent both margins.
5662 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5663 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5666 arg "newline-insert newline"
5672 \begin_layout Subsection
5674 \begin_inset Index idx
5677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5693 \begin_layout Standard
5695 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5705 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5706 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5715 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5716 lets you provide your own label.
5717 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5718 describing some general features of all four of them.
5721 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5725 \begin_layout Standard
5726 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5728 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5729 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5738 reset the environment to
5742 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5743 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5744 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5748 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5752 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5759 \begin_layout Standard
5760 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5761 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5762 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5764 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5765 you read all of section
5766 \begin_inset space ~
5770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5772 reference "sec:Nesting"
5779 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5781 \begin_inset Index idx
5784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5791 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5800 \begin_layout Standard
5801 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5805 paragraph environment.
5806 It has the following properties:
5809 \begin_layout Itemize
5810 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5814 \begin_layout Itemize
5816 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5819 \begin_layout Itemize
5820 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5824 \begin_layout Itemize
5825 The items can have any length.
5827 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5828 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5835 \begin_layout Itemize
5840 environment inside another
5844 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5848 \begin_layout Itemize
5849 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5852 \begin_layout Itemize
5854 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5857 \begin_layout Itemize
5859 \begin_inset space ~
5863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5865 reference "sec:Nesting"
5869 for a full explanation of nesting.
5873 \begin_layout Standard
5874 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5883 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5886 \begin_layout Standard
5887 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5888 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5891 \begin_layout Itemize
5892 The label for the first level
5896 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5900 \begin_layout Itemize
5901 The label for the second level is a dash.
5905 \begin_layout Itemize
5906 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5910 \begin_layout Itemize
5911 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5915 \begin_layout Itemize
5916 Back out to the third level.
5920 \begin_layout Itemize
5921 Back to the second level.
5925 \begin_layout Itemize
5926 Back to the outermost level.
5929 \begin_layout Standard
5930 These are the default labels for an
5935 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5937 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5940 dialog in the submenu
5945 \begin_inset Index idx
5948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5954 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5958 \begin_layout Standard
5959 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5960 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5962 \begin_inset space ~
5966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5968 reference "sec:Nesting"
5975 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5977 \begin_inset Index idx
5980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5987 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5989 name "sec:Enumerate"
5996 \begin_layout Standard
6001 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6002 It has these properties:
6005 \begin_layout Enumerate
6006 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6010 \begin_layout Enumerate
6011 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6015 \begin_layout Enumerate
6017 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6020 \begin_layout Enumerate
6025 environment resets the counter to one.
6028 \begin_layout Enumerate
6041 \begin_layout Enumerate
6042 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6043 Items can have any length.
6046 \begin_layout Enumerate
6047 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6050 \begin_layout Enumerate
6051 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6054 \begin_layout Enumerate
6055 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6059 \begin_layout Standard
6068 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6070 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6071 labels the four different levels in an
6078 \begin_layout Enumerate
6079 The first level of an
6083 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6087 \begin_layout Enumerate
6088 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6092 \begin_layout Enumerate
6093 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6097 \begin_layout Enumerate
6098 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6101 \begin_layout Enumerate
6102 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6107 \begin_layout Enumerate
6108 Back to the third level
6112 \begin_layout Enumerate
6113 Back to the second level.
6117 \begin_layout Enumerate
6118 Back to the outermost level.
6121 \begin_layout Standard
6122 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6126 environment, see section
6127 \begin_inset space ~
6131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6133 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6138 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6142 \begin_layout Standard
6143 There is more to nesting
6147 environments than we've stated here.
6148 You should read section
6149 \begin_inset space ~
6153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6155 reference "sec:Nesting"
6159 to learn more about nesting.
6162 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6164 \begin_inset Index idx
6167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6176 \begin_layout Standard
6177 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6181 list has no fixed label.
6182 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6191 of the first line as the label.
6195 \begin_layout Description
6196 Example: This is an example of the
6203 \begin_layout Standard
6205 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6209 \begin_layout Standard
6211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6218 it is meant that the first usage of the
6222 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6224 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6232 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6237 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6238 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6240 \begin_inset space ~
6246 \begin_inset space ~
6250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6252 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6256 for more information.) Here is an example:
6259 \begin_layout Description
6261 \begin_inset space ~
6264 Example: This one shows how to use a
6267 \begin_inset space ~
6279 \begin_layout Description
6280 Usage: You should use the
6284 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6285 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6287 It's not a good idea to use a
6291 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6292 You're better off using
6304 paragraphs into them.
6307 \begin_layout Description
6308 Nesting: You can nest
6312 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6316 \begin_layout Standard
6317 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6318 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6319 them from the first line.
6322 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6324 \begin_inset Index idx
6327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6336 \begin_layout Standard
6341 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6342 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6346 \begin_layout Standard
6355 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6357 Here are its properties:
6360 \begin_layout Labeling
6361 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6363 \begin_inset space ~
6366 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6375 of each line as the item label.
6380 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6381 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6382 space as described above.
6385 \begin_layout Labeling
6386 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6387 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6388 uses different margins for the item label and the
6389 body of the item text.
6390 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6391 label width plus a little extra space.
6395 \begin_layout Labeling
6396 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6398 \begin_inset space ~
6401 width \SpecialChar LyX
6402 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6403 If the label width is larger, the label
6404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6411 into the first line.
6412 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6413 margin of the rest of the item text.
6416 \begin_layout Labeling
6417 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6419 \begin_inset space ~
6422 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6427 environment has the same left margin.
6428 \begin_inset Newline newline
6431 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6434 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6436 \begin_inset space ~
6441 dialog (toolbar button
6444 arg "layout-paragraph"
6451 \begin_inset space ~
6456 determines the default label width.
6457 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6466 multiple times instead.
6467 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6477 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6480 \begin_inset space ~
6485 every time you alter a label in a
6490 \begin_inset Newline newline
6493 The predefined default width is the length of
6494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6502 \begin_inset space ~
6508 \begin_layout Standard
6513 list the same way as the
6517 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6523 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6527 \begin_layout Standard
6532 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6533 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6535 \begin_inset space ~
6539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6541 reference "sec:Nesting"
6545 to learn about nesting.
6548 \begin_layout Standard
6549 There is yet another feature of the
6553 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6554 left-justifies the item labels by
6556 You can use additional
6560 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6561 justifies the item label.
6566 are documented in section
6567 \begin_inset space ~
6571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6573 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6578 Here are some examples:
6581 \begin_layout Labeling
6582 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6583 Left The default for
6590 \begin_layout Labeling
6591 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6592 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6599 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6602 \begin_layout Labeling
6603 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6604 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6608 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6615 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6618 \begin_layout Subsection
6620 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6622 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6627 \begin_inset Index idx
6630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6639 \begin_layout Standard
6640 The features described in this section require that the module
6642 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6644 is loaded in the document settings.
6645 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6651 \begin_inset Index idx
6654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6656 -packages ! enumitem
6664 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6665 Custom Enumerate Lists
6666 \begin_inset Index idx
6669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6670 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6678 \begin_layout Standard
6680 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6683 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6685 \change_inserted 1414654397 1468603313
6687 \change_deleted 1414654397 1468603316
6692 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6693 There you add the command
6696 \begin_layout Standard
6704 \begin_layout Standard
6716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6717 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6718 Code, look at section
6719 \begin_inset space ~
6723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6725 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6739 \change_inserted 1414654397 1468603336
6741 \change_deleted 1414654397 1468603338
6744 the first level counter of the enumeration.
6751 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6752 For capital Roman numerals replace
6764 in the command above.
6765 For Arabic numerals use
6773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6780 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6795 \begin_layout Standard
6797 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6805 You can only number 26
6806 \begin_inset space ~
6809 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6817 \begin_layout Standard
6818 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6819 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6822 \begin_layout Standard
6823 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6826 \begin_layout Enumerate
6827 \begin_inset Argument 1
6830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6856 \begin_layout Enumerate
6857 \begin_inset Argument 1
6860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6883 \begin_layout Enumerate
6888 \begin_layout Enumerate
6889 \begin_inset Argument 1
6892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6916 \begin_layout Enumerate
6917 \begin_inset Argument 1
6920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6946 \begin_layout Standard
6947 For this list these commands were used:
6950 \begin_layout Standard
6961 \begin_inset Newline newline
6969 \begin_inset Newline newline
6977 \begin_inset Newline newline
6987 \begin_layout Standard
6994 makes the label emphasized and
7003 \begin_layout Standard
7004 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7012 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7013 lists until you change the definition.
7021 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7023 \begin_inset Index idx
7026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7027 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7035 \begin_layout Standard
7036 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7039 \begin_layout Enumerate
7040 \begin_inset Argument 1
7043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7062 \begin_inset Note Note
7065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7066 goes back to default numbering
7074 \begin_layout Enumerate
7078 \begin_layout Standard
7082 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7086 \begin_layout Standard
7087 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7092 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7093 to indicate that it is a resumed
7094 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7095 , but in the output.
7098 \begin_layout Standard
7099 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7107 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7116 \begin_layout Standard
7117 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7119 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7120 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7121 of a normal enumeration.
7122 There, insert the command
7125 \begin_layout Standard
7131 \begin_layout Standard
7136 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7140 \begin_layout Enumerate
7144 \begin_layout Enumerate
7148 \begin_layout Standard
7149 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7152 \begin_layout Enumerate
7153 \begin_inset Argument 1
7156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7172 This enumeration starts at 4
7175 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7177 \begin_inset Index idx
7180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7189 \begin_layout Standard
7190 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7192 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7195 \begin_layout Itemize
7199 \begin_layout Itemize
7200 with standard spacing
7203 \begin_layout Standard
7204 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7206 Add there the command
7210 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7213 \begin_layout Itemize
7214 \begin_inset Argument 1
7217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7236 \begin_layout Itemize
7240 \begin_layout Itemize
7244 \begin_layout Standard
7245 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7252 \begin_inset Index idx
7255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7257 -packages ! enumitem
7263 For more information see its documentation,
7264 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7273 \begin_layout Standard
7274 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7276 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7277 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7278 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7281 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7284 \begin_layout Enumerate
7285 \begin_inset Argument 1
7288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7296 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7309 \begin_layout Enumerate
7310 with negative indentation
7313 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7314 Further Customization
7315 \begin_inset Index idx
7318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7319 Lists ! Customization
7327 \begin_layout Standard
7328 You can also change the style of description lists.
7332 \begin_layout Standard
7338 \begin_layout Standard
7339 changes the description label font, the command
7342 \begin_layout Standard
7348 \begin_layout Standard
7349 sets the list style.
7352 \begin_layout Standard
7353 An example where the command
7356 \begin_layout Standard
7361 itshape, style=nextline
7364 \begin_layout Standard
7368 \begin_layout Description
7370 \begin_inset space ~
7374 \begin_inset Argument 1
7377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7383 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7385 itshape, style=nextline
7395 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7396 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7400 \begin_layout Description
7402 \begin_inset space ~
7405 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7406 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7407 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7410 \begin_layout Standard
7411 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7417 \begin_inset Index idx
7420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7422 -packages ! enumitem
7428 For more information see its documentation
7429 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7438 \begin_layout Subsection
7440 \begin_inset Index idx
7443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7452 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7454 \begin_inset space ~
7457 Address: An Overview
7460 \begin_layout Standard
7461 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7462 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7470 \begin_inset space ~
7476 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7477 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7478 gags on the document.
7479 In contrast, you can use the
7486 \begin_inset space ~
7491 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7492 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7496 \begin_layout Standard
7497 Of course, you're not limited to using
7504 \begin_inset space ~
7513 \begin_inset space ~
7518 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7519 some European academic papers.
7522 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7524 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7526 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7533 \begin_layout Standard
7538 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7539 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7543 \begin_inset space ~
7548 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7549 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7550 Here's an example of each:
7553 \begin_layout Right Address
7555 \begin_inset Newline newline
7559 \begin_inset Newline newline
7563 \begin_inset Newline newline
7566 When is it? What is today?
7569 \begin_layout Standard
7573 \begin_inset space ~
7579 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7581 the largest block of text on a single line.
7582 Here's an example of the
7589 \begin_layout Address
7591 \begin_inset Newline newline
7594 Where do I send this
7595 \begin_inset Newline newline
7598 Your post office and country
7601 \begin_layout Standard
7602 As you can see, both
7609 \begin_inset space ~
7614 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7619 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7620 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7626 This makes sense, since
7634 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7635 Thus, you have to use
7642 arg "newline-insert newline"
7647 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7648 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7650 \begin_inset space ~
7654 \begin_inset space ~
7659 ) to start a new line in an
7666 \begin_inset space ~
7674 \begin_layout Subsection
7678 \begin_layout Standard
7679 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7680 or list of references.
7682 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7685 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7687 \begin_inset Index idx
7690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7699 \begin_layout Standard
7704 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7705 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7706 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7707 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7721 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7722 The book document classes ignores the
7726 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7730 in a letter document class.
7733 \begin_layout Standard
7738 environment does several things for you.
7739 First, it puts the centered label
7740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7748 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7750 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7751 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7752 the subsequent text.
7753 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7755 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7759 \begin_layout Standard
7760 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7764 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7765 The new paragraph will still be in the
7770 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7771 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7774 \begin_layout Standard
7775 \begin_inset Float figure
7780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7782 \begin_inset Graphics
7783 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7791 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7794 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7796 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7817 \begin_layout Standard
7818 We would love to demonstrate the
7822 environment, but since this document is in the
7823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7830 class, we can't do this.
7831 We inserted it therefore as figure
7832 \begin_inset space ~
7836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7838 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7843 If you have never heard of an
7844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7851 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7854 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7856 \begin_inset Index idx
7859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7866 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7868 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7875 \begin_layout Standard
7880 environment is used to list references.
7881 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7882 only use it at the end of the document.
7894 \begin_layout Standard
7895 When you first open a
7899 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7900 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7916 depending on the document class.
7917 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7918 Each paragraph of the
7922 environment is a bibliography entry.
7927 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7928 Each new paragraph is still in the
7935 \begin_layout Standard
7936 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7937 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7939 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7941 handling, have a look at section
7942 \begin_inset space ~
7946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7948 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7955 \begin_layout Subsection
7956 Special Environments
7959 \begin_layout Standard
7961 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7962 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7965 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7970 \begin_inset Index idx
7973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7981 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7983 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7990 \begin_layout Standard
7996 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7998 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8003 key as a fixed whitespace.
8007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8020 \begin_inset space ~
8025 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8043 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8046 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8049 arg "newline-insert newline"
8066 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8067 So, when you finish using the
8072 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8073 Also, you can nest the
8078 environment inside of others.
8081 \begin_layout Standard
8082 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8085 \begin_layout Itemize
8089 arg "newline-insert newline"
8092 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8093 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8097 \begin_inset space \space{}
8107 arg "newline-insert newline"
8113 \begin_layout Itemize
8117 arg "newline-insert newline"
8127 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8133 \begin_layout Itemize
8134 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8135 You must put at least one
8139 in any line you want blank.
8140 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8144 \begin_layout Itemize
8145 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8149 since that will insert
8154 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8157 arg "self-insert \""
8163 \begin_layout Standard
8167 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8171 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8175 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8179 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8183 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8184 printf("Hello World!
8189 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8193 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8197 \begin_layout Standard
8198 This is just the standard
8199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8210 \begin_layout Standard
8216 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8218 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8219 as if you used a typewriter.
8220 \begin_inset Index idx
8223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8224 Paragraph environments|)
8229 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8232 Program Code Listings
8237 \begin_inset space ~
8245 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8249 \begin_inset Index idx
8252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8261 \begin_layout Standard
8266 environment is similar to the
8271 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8272 computer console text.
8277 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8291 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8292 you can have empty lines.
8305 \begin_layout Itemize
8306 have a certain language and a text style
8309 \begin_layout Itemize
8310 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8311 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8312 and \SpecialChar TeX
8316 \begin_layout Standard
8317 Because of these properties
8321 works like a typewriter.
8325 \begin_layout Verbatim
8330 \begin_layout Verbatim
8334 The following 2 lines are empty:
8337 \begin_layout Verbatim
8341 \begin_layout Verbatim
8345 \begin_layout Verbatim
8347 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8352 \begin_layout Standard
8357 environment is identical to
8361 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8362 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8369 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8374 \begin_layout Section
8375 Nesting Environments
8376 \begin_inset Index idx
8379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8380 Nesting ! Environments
8386 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8395 \begin_layout Subsection
8399 \begin_layout Standard
8401 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8403 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8405 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8407 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8419 \begin_layout Enumerate
8423 \begin_layout Enumerate
8428 \begin_layout Enumerate
8432 \begin_layout Enumerate
8437 \begin_layout Enumerate
8441 \begin_layout Standard
8442 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8443 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8445 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8447 \begin_inset space ~
8451 \begin_inset space ~
8459 \begin_inset space ~
8463 \begin_inset space ~
8468 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8470 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8473 arg "depth-increment"
8479 arg "depth-decrement"
8493 arg "depth-increment"
8499 arg "depth-decrement"
8503 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8504 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8508 \begin_layout Standard
8509 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8510 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8511 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8512 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8513 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8516 \begin_layout Standard
8517 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8519 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8521 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8524 \begin_layout Subsection
8525 What You Can and Can't Nest
8528 \begin_layout Standard
8529 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8530 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8533 \begin_layout Standard
8534 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8535 than a simple yes or no.
8536 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8539 \begin_layout Itemize
8540 Completely unnestable
8543 \begin_layout Itemize
8544 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8548 \begin_layout Itemize
8549 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8553 \begin_layout Standard
8554 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8555 environments have them:
8558 \begin_layout Description
8559 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8560 Can't nest into them.
8564 \begin_layout Itemize
8570 \begin_layout Itemize
8576 \begin_layout Itemize
8582 \begin_layout Itemize
8588 \begin_layout Itemize
8595 \begin_layout Description
8597 \begin_inset space ~
8600 Nestable You can nest them.
8601 You can nest other things into them.
8605 \begin_layout Itemize
8611 \begin_layout Itemize
8617 \begin_layout Itemize
8623 \begin_layout Itemize
8629 \begin_layout Itemize
8635 \begin_layout Itemize
8641 \begin_layout Itemize
8647 \begin_layout Itemize
8654 \begin_layout Itemize
8660 \begin_layout Itemize
8667 \begin_layout Description
8668 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8669 You can't nest anything into them.
8673 \begin_layout Itemize
8679 \begin_layout Itemize
8685 \begin_layout Itemize
8691 \begin_layout Itemize
8697 \begin_layout Itemize
8703 \begin_layout Itemize
8709 \begin_layout Itemize
8715 \begin_layout Itemize
8721 \begin_layout Itemize
8727 \begin_layout Itemize
8733 \begin_layout Itemize
8739 \begin_layout Itemize
8745 \begin_layout Itemize
8751 \begin_layout Itemize
8755 \begin_inset space ~
8761 \begin_layout Itemize
8768 \begin_layout Standard
8769 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8777 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8787 \begin_inset space ~
8790 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8791 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8792 nested section headings violate this.
8800 \begin_layout Subsection
8801 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8802 \begin_inset Index idx
8805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8806 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8814 \begin_layout Standard
8815 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8816 affected by nesting anyhow.
8820 \begin_layout Itemize
8824 \begin_layout Itemize
8828 \begin_layout Itemize
8832 \begin_layout Standard
8834 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8842 Figures and tables in
8846 are not affected by this.
8851 Have a look at section
8852 \begin_inset space ~
8856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8858 reference "sec:Floats"
8862 for more information about
8869 \begin_layout Standard
8871 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8872 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8876 \begin_layout Standard
8877 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8885 of its own, it behaves just like a
8886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8893 paragraph environment.
8894 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8898 \begin_layout Standard
8899 Here's an example with a table:
8902 \begin_layout Enumerate
8907 \begin_layout Enumerate
8908 This is (a) and it's nested.
8912 \begin_layout Standard
8913 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8919 \begin_layout Standard
8921 \begin_inset Tabular
8922 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8923 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8924 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8925 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9009 \begin_layout Standard
9010 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9017 \begin_layout Enumerate
9019 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9023 \begin_layout Enumerate
9027 \begin_layout Standard
9028 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9031 \begin_layout Enumerate
9036 \begin_layout Enumerate
9037 This is (a) and it's nested.
9041 \begin_layout Standard
9042 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9048 \begin_layout Standard
9050 \begin_inset Tabular
9051 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9052 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9053 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9054 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9138 \begin_layout Standard
9139 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9145 \begin_layout Enumerate
9152 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9155 \begin_layout Enumerate
9159 \begin_layout Standard
9160 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9164 \begin_layout Standard
9165 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9168 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9171 \begin_layout Enumerate
9176 \begin_layout Enumerate
9177 This is (a) and it's nested.
9180 \begin_layout Standard
9181 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9187 \begin_layout Standard
9189 \begin_inset Tabular
9190 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9191 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9192 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9193 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9278 \begin_layout Standard
9279 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9285 \begin_layout Enumerate
9287 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9294 \begin_layout Enumerate
9298 \begin_layout Standard
9299 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9305 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9306 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9310 \begin_layout Subsection
9311 Usage and General Features
9314 \begin_layout Standard
9315 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9316 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9325 is the innermost possible depth.
9326 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9329 \begin_layout Enumerate
9330 level #1 – outermost
9334 \begin_layout Enumerate
9339 \begin_layout Enumerate
9344 \begin_layout Enumerate
9349 \begin_layout Itemize
9354 \begin_layout Itemize
9363 \begin_layout Standard
9364 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9365 both of them in the example.
9366 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9376 For example, if we tried to nest another
9381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9388 , we would get errors.
9391 \begin_layout Subsection
9393 \begin_inset Index idx
9396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9405 \begin_layout Standard
9406 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9407 We have several examples of nested environments.
9408 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9412 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9413 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9416 \begin_layout Labeling
9417 \labelwidthstring MMM
9418 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9427 \begin_layout Labeling
9428 \labelwidthstring MMM
9429 #2-a This is level #2.
9430 We created it by using
9433 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9439 arg "depth-increment"
9446 \begin_layout Labeling
9447 \labelwidthstring MMM
9448 #3-a This is level #3.
9449 This time, we just enter
9456 arg "depth-increment"
9460 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9464 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9470 arg "depth-increment"
9477 \begin_layout Standard
9482 environment, nested inside of
9483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9491 So, it's at level #4.
9492 We did this by entering
9495 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9501 arg "depth-increment"
9504 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9509 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9525 \begin_layout Standard
9530 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9533 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9539 \begin_layout Labeling
9540 \labelwidthstring MMM
9541 #4-a This is level #4.
9545 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9548 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9553 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9557 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9562 keep nesting things inside
9563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9574 \begin_layout Labeling
9575 \labelwidthstring MMM
9576 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9581 \begin_layout Labeling
9582 \labelwidthstring MMM
9583 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9584 and this is level #6.
9585 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9589 \begin_layout Labeling
9590 \labelwidthstring MMM
9591 #5-b Back to level #5.
9595 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9601 arg "depth-decrement"
9608 \begin_layout Labeling
9609 \labelwidthstring MMM
9613 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9619 arg "depth-decrement"
9622 , we're back at level #4.
9626 \begin_layout Labeling
9627 \labelwidthstring MMM
9628 #3-b Back to level #3.
9629 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9633 \begin_layout Labeling
9634 \labelwidthstring MMM
9635 #2-b Back to level #2.
9640 \begin_layout Labeling
9641 \labelwidthstring MMM
9642 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9643 After this sentence, we will enter
9647 and change the paragraph environment back to
9654 \begin_layout Standard
9655 We could have also used the
9671 environment in place of the
9676 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9679 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9680 Example 2: Inheritance
9683 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9684 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9687 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9696 arg "depth-increment"
9700 \begin_inset Newline newline
9703 which, we will change to the
9711 \begin_layout Enumerate
9716 environment, at level #2.
9719 \begin_layout Enumerate
9720 Notice how the nested
9724 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9728 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9732 \begin_layout Standard
9733 We ended this example by entering
9738 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9742 and reset the nesting depth by using
9745 arg "depth-decrement"
9751 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9752 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9761 \begin_inset Argument 1
9764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9765 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9773 \begin_layout Enumerate
9774 This is level #1, in an
9778 paragraph environment.
9779 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9783 \begin_layout Enumerate
9788 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9794 arg "depth-increment"
9798 Now, what happens if we nest an
9802 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9803 label be? An asterisk?
9807 \begin_layout Itemize
9817 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9818 So, its label is a bullet.
9819 (We got here by using
9822 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9828 arg "depth-increment"
9831 , then changing the environment to
9839 \begin_layout Itemize
9840 Here's level #4, produced using
9843 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9849 arg "depth-increment"
9853 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9858 \begin_layout Enumerate
9861 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9866 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9870 , because we are in the
9878 environment (that is, it is an
9893 \begin_layout Enumerate
9898 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9899 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9903 \begin_layout Enumerate
9904 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9907 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9910 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9913 \begin_layout Enumerate
9917 arg "depth-decrement"
9920 to decrease the depth after the next
9923 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9930 \begin_layout Enumerate
9932 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9937 \begin_layout Enumerate
9939 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9940 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9944 \begin_layout Enumerate
9945 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9954 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9959 reset the counter for the label.
9963 \begin_layout Enumerate
9967 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9973 arg "depth-decrement"
9976 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9977 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9978 into the twofold-nested
9986 \begin_layout Enumerate
9987 The same thing happens if we do another
9990 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9996 arg "depth-decrement"
9999 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10002 \begin_layout Standard
10003 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10008 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10019 The number of other
10023 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10030 The same rule applies for the
10034 environment, as well.
10037 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10038 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10041 \begin_layout Enumerate
10042 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10043 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10044 the same detail with how we did it.
10053 \begin_layout Standard
10061 arg "depth-increment"
10068 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10069 the example in parentheses someplace.
10070 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10071 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10072 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10076 \begin_layout Enumerate
10081 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10085 \begin_layout Verse
10086 Now we will add verse.
10087 \begin_inset Newline newline
10090 It will get much worse.
10091 \begin_inset Newline newline
10101 arg "depth-increment"
10111 \begin_layout Verse
10112 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10113 \begin_inset Newline newline
10116 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10117 \begin_inset Newline newline
10123 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10131 \begin_layout Verse
10132 Here comes a table:
10136 \begin_layout Standard
10137 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10143 \begin_layout Standard
10145 \begin_inset Tabular
10146 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10147 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10148 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10149 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10234 \begin_layout Verse
10238 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10248 arg "depth-increment"
10254 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10260 \begin_inset Newline newline
10268 arg "depth-decrement"
10275 \begin_layout Enumerate
10280 : level #1) This is another item.
10281 Note that selecting a
10285 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10286 3 times to put the table inside the
10294 \begin_layout Quotation
10295 We're now ending the
10299 list and changing to
10304 We're still at level #1.
10305 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10306 The next set of paragraphs is a
10307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10314 We will nest both the
10321 \begin_inset space ~
10326 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10330 for the letter body.
10334 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10337 to preserve the depth.
10338 Remember that you need to use
10341 arg "newline-insert newline"
10344 to create multiple lines inside the
10351 \begin_inset space ~
10361 \begin_layout Right Address
10363 \begin_inset Newline newline
10366 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10367 \begin_inset Newline newline
10373 \begin_layout Address
10375 \begin_inset space ~
10381 \begin_layout Quotation
10382 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10383 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10386 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10387 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10388 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10389 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10390 as soon as possible.
10391 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10394 \begin_layout Quotation
10395 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10396 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10397 with your order, along with payment.
10400 \begin_layout Quotation
10401 We thank you again for your patience.
10404 \begin_layout Address
10406 \begin_inset Newline newline
10413 \begin_layout Quotation
10414 That ends that example!
10417 \begin_layout Standard
10418 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10419 gives you a lot of power with just
10421 We could have easily nested an
10442 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10445 \begin_layout Subsection
10447 \begin_inset Index idx
10450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10451 Nesting ! Separation
10457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10459 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10466 \begin_layout Standard
10467 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10469 For example you need two different enumerations:
10472 \begin_layout Enumerate
10477 \begin_layout Enumerate
10482 \begin_layout Enumerate
10486 \begin_layout Standard
10487 \begin_inset Separator plain
10493 \begin_layout Itemize
10499 \begin_layout Standard
10500 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10506 \begin_layout Enumerate
10510 \begin_layout Enumerate
10514 \begin_layout Enumerate
10518 \begin_layout Standard
10519 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10520 list item and use the menu
10522 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10523 Start New Environment
10526 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10527 ) and behind it the new list.
10530 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10531 Start New Parent Environment
10533 only appears if the item is nested.
10534 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10538 \begin_layout Standard
10539 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10540 (red arrow in LyX).
10541 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10542 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10545 \begin_layout Standard
10546 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10549 arg "paragraph-break"
10556 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10559 \begin_layout Section
10560 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10561 \begin_inset Index idx
10564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10573 \begin_layout Standard
10574 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10575 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10577 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10578 be broken at the end of a line.
10579 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10583 \begin_layout Subsection
10585 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10587 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10592 \begin_inset Index idx
10595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10604 \begin_layout Standard
10605 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10606 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10607 ) not to break the line at
10609 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10612 \begin_layout Quote
10613 Further documentation is given in section
10614 \begin_inset Newline newline
10618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10620 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10628 \begin_layout Standard
10629 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10642 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10644 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10653 A protected space is set with
10655 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10656 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10658 \begin_inset space ~
10666 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10672 \begin_layout Subsection
10674 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10676 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10681 \begin_inset Index idx
10684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10685 Spacing ! Horizontal
10693 \begin_layout Standard
10694 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10696 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10697 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10701 The length units are listed in Appendix
10702 \begin_inset space ~
10706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10708 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10715 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10719 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10724 \begin_inset Index idx
10727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10728 Spaces ! Inter-word
10736 \begin_layout Standard
10737 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10738 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10739 at the ends of sentences.
10740 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10741 automatically takes care about this.
10742 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10743 followed by a period; see section
10744 \begin_inset space ~
10748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10750 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10755 To insert a normal space, select
10757 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10758 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10760 \begin_inset space ~
10768 arg "space-insert normal"
10774 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10776 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10778 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10783 \begin_inset Index idx
10786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10795 \begin_layout Standard
10797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10804 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10813 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10814 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10815 inside abbreviations:
10818 \begin_layout Quote
10820 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10824 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10827 \begin_layout Standard
10828 or between values and units.
10829 Compare for example this:
10830 \begin_inset Newline newline
10834 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10838 \begin_inset Newline newline
10841 10 kg (normal space
10844 \begin_layout Standard
10845 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10847 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10848 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10850 \begin_inset space ~
10858 arg "space-insert thin"
10864 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10868 \begin_layout Standard
10869 You can also insert the following space types:
10872 \begin_layout Description
10874 \begin_inset space ~
10878 \begin_inset space ~
10881 space A line with a
10882 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10886 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10890 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10893 negative thin space between the arrows.
10896 \begin_layout Description
10898 \begin_inset space ~
10902 \begin_inset space ~
10905 space A line with a
10906 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10910 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10914 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10917 negative medium space between the arrows.
10920 \begin_layout Description
10922 \begin_inset space ~
10926 \begin_inset space ~
10929 space A line with a
10930 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10934 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10938 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10941 negative thick space between the arrows.
10944 \begin_layout Description
10946 \begin_inset space ~
10950 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10954 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10958 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10962 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10966 \begin_inset space ~
10970 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10973 em) space between the arrows.
10976 \begin_layout Description
10978 \begin_inset space ~
10982 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10986 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10990 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10994 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10998 \begin_inset space ~
11002 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11005 em) space between the arrows.
11008 \begin_layout Description
11010 \begin_inset space ~
11014 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11018 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11022 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11026 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11030 \begin_inset space ~
11034 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11037 em) space between the arrows.
11040 \begin_layout Description
11042 \begin_inset space ~
11046 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11050 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11055 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11059 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11062 cm space between the arrows.
11065 \begin_layout Standard
11067 \begin_inset space ~
11071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11073 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11077 lists the different space sizes.
11080 \begin_layout Standard
11081 \begin_inset Float table
11086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11087 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11090 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11092 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11096 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11106 \begin_inset Tabular
11107 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11108 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11109 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11110 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11150 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11174 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11198 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11222 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11226 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11230 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11278 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11306 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11321 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11334 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11349 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11362 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11383 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11385 \begin_inset Index idx
11388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11397 \begin_layout Standard
11398 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11399 feature for adding extra space
11400 in a uniform fashion.
11401 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11402 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11403 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11404 equally between themselves.
11407 \begin_layout Standard
11408 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11411 \begin_layout Quote
11413 This is on the left side
11414 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11417 This is on the right
11420 \begin_layout Quote
11423 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11427 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11433 \begin_layout Quote
11436 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11440 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11444 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11450 \begin_layout Standard
11451 That was an example in the
11457 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11461 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11465 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11468 is one in a standard paragraph.
11469 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11473 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11476 \begin_layout Standard
11477 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11480 \begin_inset space ~
11485 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11488 \begin_layout Standard
11490 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11494 \begin_inset space ~
11500 \begin_layout Standard
11502 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11506 \begin_inset space ~
11512 \begin_layout Standard
11514 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11518 \begin_inset space ~
11524 \begin_layout Standard
11526 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11530 \begin_inset space ~
11536 \begin_layout Standard
11538 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11542 \begin_inset space ~
11548 \begin_layout Standard
11550 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11554 \begin_inset space ~
11560 \begin_layout Standard
11561 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11569 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11573 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11575 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11576 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11580 option in the space dialog.
11588 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11590 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11592 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11597 \begin_inset Index idx
11600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11609 \begin_layout Standard
11610 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11611 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11614 \begin_layout Standard
11615 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11618 What is correct English?:
11619 \begin_inset Newline newline
11623 \begin_inset Newline newline
11627 \begin_inset space ~
11630 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11631 \begin_inset Newline newline
11635 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11646 \begin_inset Newline newline
11650 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11661 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11667 \begin_layout Standard
11669 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11674 \begin_inset space ~
11678 \begin_inset space ~
11682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11686 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11688 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11689 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11693 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11699 \begin_inset space ~
11703 \begin_inset space ~
11707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11710 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11719 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11720 That is why it is named
11721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11729 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11730 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11734 \begin_layout Subsection
11736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11738 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11743 \begin_inset Index idx
11746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11755 \begin_layout Standard
11756 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11758 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11759 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11761 \begin_inset space ~
11767 There you find the following sizes:
11770 \begin_layout Standard
11783 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11784 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11789 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11791 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11792 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11794 \begin_inset space ~
11800 \begin_inset Index idx
11803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11804 Document ! Settings
11809 for the paragraph separation.
11810 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11821 \begin_layout Standard
11827 \begin_inset Index idx
11830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11836 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11837 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11842 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11843 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11852 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11861 s are described in section
11862 \begin_inset space ~
11866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11868 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11877 If there are several
11881 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11882 You can therefore use
11886 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11889 \begin_layout Standard
11894 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11895 \begin_inset space ~
11899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11901 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11908 \begin_layout Standard
11909 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11919 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11920 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11932 \begin_layout Subsection
11933 Paragraph Alignment
11934 \begin_inset Index idx
11937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11938 Paragraph ! Alignment
11946 \begin_layout Standard
11947 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11949 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11952 dialog (toolbar button
11955 arg "layout-paragraph"
11959 There are five possibilities:
11962 \begin_layout Itemize
11970 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11976 \begin_layout Itemize
11984 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11990 \begin_layout Itemize
11998 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12004 \begin_layout Itemize
12012 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12018 \begin_layout Itemize
12026 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12032 \begin_layout Standard
12033 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12034 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12035 the left and right margins.
12036 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12039 \begin_layout Standard
12041 This paragraph is right aligned,
12044 \begin_layout Standard
12046 this one is centered,
12049 \begin_layout Standard
12051 this one is left aligned.
12054 \begin_layout Subsection
12056 \begin_inset Index idx
12059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12060 Page breaks ! Forced
12066 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12068 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12075 \begin_layout Standard
12076 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12077 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12078 force a page break where you want one.
12079 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12080 is good at page breaking.
12081 Only if you use a lot of
12085 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12086 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12089 \begin_layout Standard
12090 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12091 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12095 have to change the page breaking.
12098 \begin_layout Standard
12099 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12101 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12103 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12104 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12106 \begin_inset space ~
12112 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12114 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12115 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12117 \begin_inset space ~
12122 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12124 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12125 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12128 \begin_layout Standard
12129 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12130 at the top of a page.
12131 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12133 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12134 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12135 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12139 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12143 to learn more about
12150 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12152 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12154 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12159 \begin_inset Index idx
12162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12163 Page breaks ! Clear
12171 \begin_layout Standard
12172 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12173 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12174 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12175 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12176 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12179 \begin_layout Standard
12180 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12182 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12183 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12185 \begin_inset space ~
12191 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12193 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12194 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12196 \begin_inset space ~
12200 \begin_inset space ~
12205 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12206 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12209 \begin_layout Subsection
12211 \begin_inset Index idx
12214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12221 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12223 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12230 \begin_layout Standard
12231 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12233 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12235 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12236 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12238 \begin_inset space ~
12242 \begin_inset space ~
12250 arg "newline-insert newline"
12254 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12256 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12257 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12259 \begin_inset space ~
12263 \begin_inset space ~
12271 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12274 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12276 This is useful to avoid
12277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12284 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12287 \begin_layout Standard
12288 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12289 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12291 very good at line breaking.
12292 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12293 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12294 \begin_inset space ~
12298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12300 reference "sec:Quote"
12305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12307 reference "sec:Verse"
12312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12314 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12321 \begin_layout Subsection
12323 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12325 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12330 \begin_inset Index idx
12333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12342 \begin_layout Standard
12344 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12355 \begin_layout Standard
12359 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12360 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12362 \begin_inset space ~
12367 you can insert horizontal lines.
12368 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12369 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12370 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12373 \begin_layout Standard
12375 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12386 \begin_layout Section
12387 Characters and Symbols
12390 \begin_layout Standard
12391 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12392 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12393 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12395 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12401 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12405 for information on how this is done.
12408 \begin_layout Standard
12409 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12414 dialog via the menu
12416 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12417 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12423 \begin_layout Standard
12424 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12432 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12433 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12435 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12443 \begin_layout Section
12444 Fonts and Text Styles
12445 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12447 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12454 \begin_layout Subsection
12456 \begin_inset Index idx
12459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12468 \begin_layout Standard
12469 There are two types of fonts:
12472 \begin_layout Description
12474 \begin_inset space ~
12478 \begin_inset Index idx
12481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12487 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12488 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12492 characters) in the font.
12493 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12494 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12495 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12496 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12497 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12498 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12499 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12500 \begin_inset Newline newline
12503 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12504 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12505 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12506 sizes than at small ones.
12507 \begin_inset Newline newline
12521 \begin_inset space ~
12529 \begin_layout Description
12531 \begin_inset space ~
12535 \begin_inset Index idx
12538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12544 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12545 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12546 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12547 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12548 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12549 image manipulation program.
12550 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12551 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12552 \begin_inset space ~
12555 pixels high up to 34
12556 \begin_inset space ~
12559 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12560 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12561 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12563 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12564 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12565 \begin_inset Newline newline
12568 Bitmap fonts are named
12571 \begin_inset space ~
12576 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12579 \begin_layout Standard
12580 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12581 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12582 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12583 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12584 use scalable fonts.
12587 \begin_layout Standard
12588 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12591 \begin_layout Standard
12592 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12593 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12594 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12595 font to emphasize text, you use an
12596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12604 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12606 In \SpecialChar LyX
12607 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12611 \begin_layout Subsection
12614 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12616 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12623 \begin_layout Standard
12624 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12625 used its own fonts.
12626 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12627 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12630 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12631 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12632 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12633 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12634 to a word processor.
12635 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12636 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12637 files are very portable across
12638 different machines.
12639 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12640 has increased a lot
12641 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12644 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12646 \begin_inset space ~
12650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12652 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12657 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12658 code in the document
12659 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12662 \begin_layout Standard
12663 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12664 engines that are also able directly
12665 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12667 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12669 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12671 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12672 that is installed on your system.
12673 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12676 \begin_layout Standard
12677 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12685 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12686 es; so you might have to experiment.
12694 \begin_layout Subsection
12695 Document Font and Font size
12696 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12698 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12703 \begin_inset Index idx
12706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12713 \begin_inset Index idx
12716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12725 \begin_layout Standard
12726 You can set the document fonts in the
12728 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12732 \begin_inset Index idx
12735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12736 Document ! Settings
12746 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12747 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12750 \begin_inset space ~
12759 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12761 \begin_inset space ~
12764 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12767 \begin_layout Standard
12772 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12773 This requires that you use
12785 as the output format, i.
12786 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12790 \begin_inset space \space{}
12793 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12794 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12795 installed (see section
12796 \begin_inset space ~
12800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12802 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12807 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12809 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12810 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12812 \begin_inset space ~
12815 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12816 cannot determine the family.
12817 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12818 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12821 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12824 \begin_layout Standard
12825 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12826 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12831 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12837 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12838 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12846 \begin_inset space ~
12852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12865 European Computer Modern
12868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12875 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12878 \begin_layout Standard
12887 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12888 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12893 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12896 \begin_inset space ~
12901 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12907 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12908 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12911 \begin_layout Itemize
12915 \begin_inset space ~
12920 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12933 \begin_inset space ~
12938 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12939 community in order to replace
12943 as the default font.
12944 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12945 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12948 \begin_inset space ~
12961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12962 One difference is improved kerning.
12970 \begin_layout Itemize
12974 \begin_inset space ~
12978 \begin_inset space ~
12983 fonts in (the rare) case that
12986 \begin_inset space ~
12991 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
13006 Virtual means that it
13007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13018 -glyphs from other fonts.
13019 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13041 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13047 \begin_inset Index idx
13050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13052 -packages ! aeguill
13057 with the document preamble line
13058 \begin_inset Newline newline
13065 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13066 \begin_inset Newline newline
13071 will fix the guillemet problem.
13076 and that accented characters are not
13080 glyph, but built of
13084 characters, the accent and the letter.
13085 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13091 If you search for example for the French word
13092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13099 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13108 and not for the glyph
13109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13113 \begin_inset space ~
13117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13123 \begin_layout Itemize
13124 If you do not like the look of
13132 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13133 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13137 \begin_inset space ~
13143 \begin_inset space ~
13153 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13154 \begin_inset space ~
13157 serif and typewriter fonts,
13161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13162 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13163 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13169 \begin_inset space ~
13178 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13183 \begin_inset space \space{}
13191 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13195 \begin_inset space \space{}
13201 \begin_inset space ~
13209 \begin_inset space ~
13219 but you can also select your own.
13220 \begin_inset Newline newline
13223 The differences between roman,
13226 \begin_inset space ~
13235 fonts are explained in section
13236 \begin_inset space ~
13240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13242 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13247 \begin_inset Newline newline
13253 \begin_inset space ~
13258 was originally designed for newspapers.
13259 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13260 into the small newspaper columns.
13264 \begin_inset space ~
13269 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13272 \begin_layout Standard
13273 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13286 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13291 depends on the class you are using.
13292 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13295 \begin_layout Standard
13296 Note that the font size is the
13301 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13302 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13303 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13304 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13307 \begin_inset space ~
13313 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13314 \begin_inset space ~
13318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13320 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13327 \begin_layout Standard
13331 \begin_inset space ~
13336 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13338 \begin_inset space ~
13341 serif or typewriter.
13346 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13356 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13359 \begin_layout Standard
13364 LaTeX font encoding
13366 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13367 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13373 \begin_inset Index idx
13376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13378 -packages ! fontenc
13384 \begin_inset space ~
13388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13390 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13395 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13396 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13403 \begin_layout Standard
13404 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13406 Use Old Style Figures
13410 Use True Small Caps
13413 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13416 Use Old Style Figures
13418 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13420 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13425 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13428 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13432 Use True Small Caps
13434 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13435 of scaled capitals.
13436 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13437 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13440 \begin_layout Standard
13445 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13446 a font to display the script characters.
13450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13451 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13457 \begin_inset Index idx
13460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13467 So this has no effect for the document language
13481 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13485 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13493 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13498 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13499 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13501 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13503 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13506 dialog, see section
13507 \begin_inset space ~
13511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13513 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13525 \begin_layout Subsection
13529 \begin_layout Standard
13530 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13531 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13533 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13534 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13535 choose a math font in the dialog
13537 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13541 \begin_inset Index idx
13544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13545 Document ! Settings
13551 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13552 automatically selects a math font.
13553 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13554 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13563 \begin_inset space ~
13569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13574 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13575 document font is available.
13578 \begin_layout Standard
13579 Note that the math font will not be used for
13583 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13589 or by the insertion of the command
13596 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13597 \begin_inset space ~
13601 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13602 while the math characters do not.
13604 \begin_inset space ~
13607 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13610 \begin_inset space ~
13618 \begin_inset space ~
13623 in the document font settings.
13626 \begin_layout Standard
13627 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13628 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13629 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13630 font (in most cases
13631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13637 \begin_inset space ~
13643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13646 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13647 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13655 \begin_inset space ~
13661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13667 \begin_layout Subsection
13668 Using Different Character Styles
13669 \begin_inset Index idx
13672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13679 \begin_inset Index idx
13682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13691 \begin_layout Standard
13692 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13693 automatically changes the character style for certain
13694 paragraph environments.
13696 supports two character styles,
13705 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13709 \begin_layout Standard
13714 style, do one of the following:
13717 \begin_layout Itemize
13718 click on the toolbar button
13727 \begin_layout Itemize
13728 use the key binding
13737 \begin_layout Standard
13738 These commands are all toggles.
13743 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13746 \begin_layout Standard
13747 One typically uses the
13751 style for proper names.
13753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13760 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13768 \begin_layout Standard
13769 A more widely used character style is the
13774 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13781 \begin_layout Itemize
13782 clicking on the toolbar button
13791 \begin_layout Itemize
13792 using the keybindings
13801 \begin_layout Standard
13806 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13808 use a different font.
13811 \begin_layout Standard
13812 We've been using the
13816 style all over the place in this document.
13817 Here's one more example:
13820 \begin_layout Quotation
13823 Do not overuse character styles!
13826 \begin_layout Standard
13827 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13828 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13829 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13830 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13834 \begin_layout Standard
13835 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13843 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13845 \begin_inset space ~
13848 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13854 arg "dialog-show character"
13860 \begin_layout Subsection
13861 Fine-Tuning with the
13866 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13868 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13873 \begin_inset Index idx
13876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13885 \begin_layout Standard
13886 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13888 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13889 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13890 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13891 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13892 from ordinary dialog.
13895 \begin_layout Standard
13896 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13897 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13898 \begin_inset Newline newline
13901 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13902 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13905 \begin_layout Standard
13906 To use custom character styles, open the
13908 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13910 \begin_inset space ~
13913 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13916 dialog or press the toolbar button
13919 arg "dialog-show character"
13923 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13924 font property that you can choose.
13925 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13928 \begin_inset space ~
13933 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13938 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13939 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13940 environments all at once.
13943 \begin_layout Standard
13944 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13947 \begin_inset space ~
13959 \begin_layout Labeling
13960 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13974 The possible options are:
13978 \begin_layout Labeling
13979 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13984 This is the Roman font family.
13985 Normally a serif font.
13986 It's also the default family.
13996 \begin_layout Labeling
13997 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14001 \begin_inset space ~
14008 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14020 \begin_layout Labeling
14021 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14028 This is the Typewriter font family.
14034 arg "font-typewriter"
14043 \begin_layout Labeling
14044 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14049 This corresponds to the print weight.
14054 \begin_layout Labeling
14055 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14060 This is the Medium font series.
14061 It's also the default series.
14064 \begin_layout Labeling
14065 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14072 This is the Bold font series.
14085 \begin_layout Labeling
14086 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14091 As the name implies.
14096 \begin_layout Labeling
14097 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14102 This is the Upright font shape.
14103 It's also the default shape.
14106 \begin_layout Labeling
14107 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14121 s the Italic font shape
14127 \begin_layout Labeling
14128 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14135 This is the Slanted font shape
14137 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14138 , this is different from italic).
14141 \begin_layout Labeling
14142 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14146 \begin_inset space ~
14153 This is the Small caps font shape
14160 \begin_layout Labeling
14161 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14166 Alters the text color.
14167 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14171 \begin_inset space ~
14176 , which means that the document default color set in
14178 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14179 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14185 \begin_inset space ~
14190 is used, you can choose between
14267 \begin_inset Index idx
14270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14279 \begin_layout Labeling
14280 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14285 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14286 the language of the document.
14287 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14288 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14290 \begin_inset Newline newline
14293 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14295 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14296 When using the spell checking (see section
14297 \begin_inset space ~
14301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14303 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14307 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14310 \begin_layout Labeling
14311 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14316 Alters the size of the font.
14317 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14318 proportional to the document font size.
14319 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14320 the details, but a general description of what
14326 \begin_layout Labeling
14327 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14348 arg "font-size tiny"
14354 \begin_layout Labeling
14355 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14376 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14382 \begin_layout Labeling
14383 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14404 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14410 \begin_layout Labeling
14411 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14432 arg "font-size small"
14438 \begin_layout Labeling
14439 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14453 It's also the default size.
14457 arg "font-size normal"
14463 \begin_layout Labeling
14464 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14485 arg "font-size large"
14491 \begin_layout Labeling
14492 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14513 arg "font-size larger"
14519 \begin_layout Labeling
14520 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14541 arg "font-size largest"
14547 \begin_layout Labeling
14548 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14569 arg "font-size huge"
14575 \begin_layout Labeling
14576 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14597 arg "font-size giant"
14603 \begin_layout Labeling
14604 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14609 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14629 arg "font-size increase"
14635 \begin_layout Labeling
14636 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14641 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14661 arg "font-size decrease"
14668 \begin_layout Standard
14673 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14674 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14676 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14677 — use those instead.
14678 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14681 \begin_layout Labeling
14682 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14687 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14692 \begin_layout Labeling
14693 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14700 This is text with emphasize on
14703 This might seem like the same as
14707 , but it is actually a bit different.
14713 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14715 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14718 \begin_layout Labeling
14719 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14726 This is text with Underbar on.
14732 arg "font-underline"
14738 \begin_inset Newline newline
14743 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14744 when you could not change fonts.
14745 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14746 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14747 because some people
14751 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14754 \begin_layout Labeling
14755 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14759 \begin_inset space ~
14766 This is text with Double underbar on.
14772 arg "font-underunderline"
14776 \begin_inset Newline newline
14779 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14780 about double underbar.
14783 \begin_layout Labeling
14784 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14788 \begin_inset space ~
14795 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14801 arg "font-underwave"
14805 \begin_inset Newline newline
14808 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14809 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14812 \begin_layout Labeling
14813 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14820 This is text with Strikeout on.
14826 arg "font-strikeout"
14830 \begin_inset Newline newline
14833 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14834 changed in the meantime.
14837 \begin_layout Labeling
14838 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14845 This is text with Noun on.
14852 , this is a logical attribute.
14853 Normally it's equivalent to
14856 \begin_inset space ~
14865 \begin_layout Standard
14866 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14867 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14869 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14871 \begin_inset space ~
14874 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14880 arg "dialog-show character"
14883 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14884 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14887 arg "textstyle-apply"
14891 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14895 \begin_layout Standard
14896 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14903 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14904 (suppose you just set the shape to
14905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14923 \begin_inset space ~
14935 \begin_layout Standard
14936 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14944 \begin_inset space ~
14956 \begin_layout Itemize
14962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14969 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14987 \begin_inset Newline newline
14991 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15005 \begin_inset Note Note
15008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15009 For more on phantoms see section
15010 \begin_inset space ~
15014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15016 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15026 \begin_inset Newline newline
15032 \begin_layout Itemize
15037 fonts use characters with serifs.
15038 These are the small
15039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15046 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15047 The following example shows the difference:
15048 \begin_inset Newline newline
15052 \begin_inset Newline newline
15057 text without serifs
15060 \begin_inset Newline newline
15063 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15064 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15071 \begin_layout Itemize
15076 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15077 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15078 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15081 \begin_layout Standard
15082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15089 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15090 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15093 \begin_inset space ~
15098 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15099 the property to be removed.
15100 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15101 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15102 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15120 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15121 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15129 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15133 \begin_inset space ~
15138 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15149 If you, for example, set
15150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15168 \begin_inset space ~
15173 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15182 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15185 \begin_layout Standard
15186 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15187 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15190 \begin_layout Section
15191 Printing and Previewing
15194 \begin_layout Subsection
15198 \begin_layout Standard
15199 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15200 using \SpecialChar LyX
15201 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15202 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15203 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15204 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15206 Additional Features
15211 \begin_layout Standard
15213 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15216 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15217 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15218 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15221 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15222 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15223 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15224 to turn your writing into printable output.
15225 This happens in two stages:
15228 \begin_layout Enumerate
15229 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15230 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15232 a file with the extension,
15233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15247 \begin_layout Enumerate
15248 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15249 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15250 to use the commands in the
15254 file to produce printable output.
15257 \begin_layout Subsection
15258 Output file formats
15259 \begin_inset Index idx
15262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15269 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15271 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15278 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15279 Simple text (ASCII)
15280 \begin_inset Index idx
15283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15284 File formats ! ASCII
15292 \begin_layout Standard
15293 This file type has the extension
15294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15306 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15310 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15317 \begin_layout Standard
15318 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15320 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15321 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15323 \begin_inset space ~
15329 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15330 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15331 bibliography (section
15332 \begin_inset space ~
15336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15338 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15343 If your document includes such material, use
15345 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15346 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15348 \begin_inset space ~
15352 \begin_inset space ~
15356 \begin_inset space ~
15364 \begin_inset space ~
15368 \begin_inset space ~
15374 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15375 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15378 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15381 \begin_inset Index idx
15384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15385 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15394 \begin_layout Standard
15395 This file type has the extension
15396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15407 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15410 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15411 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15412 -Errors or to process it manually
15413 with console commands.
15414 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15415 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15416 's temporary directory whenever you
15417 view or export your document.
15420 \begin_layout Standard
15421 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15422 -file using the menu
15424 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15425 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15429 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15430 export variants are explained in section
15431 \begin_inset space ~
15435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15437 reference "subsec:Export"
15444 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15446 \begin_inset Index idx
15449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15458 \begin_layout Standard
15459 This file type has the extension
15460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15480 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15481 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15482 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15486 \begin_layout Standard
15487 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15488 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15489 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15490 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15491 when you view the DVI.
15492 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15495 \begin_layout Standard
15496 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15498 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15499 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15504 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15505 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15507 \begin_inset space ~
15513 The latter option uses the program
15515 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15521 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15524 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15525 font access (see section
15526 \begin_inset space ~
15530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15532 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15537 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15538 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15543 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15545 \begin_inset Index idx
15548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15549 File formats ! PostScript
15557 \begin_layout Standard
15558 This file type has the extension
15559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15571 PostScript was developed by the company
15575 as a printer language.
15576 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15578 PostScript can be seen as a
15579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15582 programming language
15583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15586 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15591 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15598 \begin_inset Index idx
15601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15603 -packages ! pstricks
15613 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15616 \begin_layout Standard
15617 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15621 Encapsulated PostScript
15622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15625 (EPS, file extension
15626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15638 As \SpecialChar LyX
15639 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15640 convert them in the background to EPS.
15641 If, for example, you have 50
15642 \begin_inset space ~
15645 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15647 \begin_inset space ~
15650 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15651 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15653 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15654 EPS to avoid this problem.
15657 \begin_layout Standard
15658 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15660 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15661 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15667 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15669 \begin_inset Index idx
15672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15679 \begin_inset Index idx
15682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15691 \begin_layout Standard
15692 This file type has the extension
15693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15709 Portable Document Format
15710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15717 was derived from PostScript.
15718 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15727 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15728 looks exactly the same.
15731 \begin_layout Standard
15732 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15736 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15740 (JPG, file extension
15741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15768 Portable Network Graphics
15769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15772 (PNG, file extension
15773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15785 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15786 converts them in the
15787 background to one of these formats.
15788 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15789 will slow down your workflow.
15790 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15793 \begin_layout Standard
15794 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15796 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15802 \begin_layout Description
15804 \begin_inset space ~
15807 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15811 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15814 \begin_layout Description
15816 \begin_inset space ~
15823 ) This uses the program
15825 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15828 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15831 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15834 is a new engine, derived from
15838 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15839 access (see section
15840 \begin_inset space ~
15844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15846 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15851 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15852 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15857 \begin_layout Description
15859 \begin_inset space ~
15866 ) This uses the program
15871 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15877 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15878 font access (see section
15879 \begin_inset space ~
15883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15885 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15890 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15891 vertically written Japanese.
15894 \begin_layout Description
15896 \begin_inset space ~
15899 (cropped) This is the same as
15902 \begin_inset space ~
15907 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15908 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15909 to generate good-looking
15910 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15913 \begin_layout Description
15915 \begin_inset space ~
15918 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15922 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15926 \begin_layout Description
15928 \begin_inset space ~
15931 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15935 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15936 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15940 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15941 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15944 \begin_layout Standard
15948 \begin_inset space ~
15957 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15958 works without problems.
15959 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15960 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15964 \begin_inset space ~
15972 \begin_inset space ~
15977 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15985 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15987 \begin_inset Index idx
15990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15991 FileFormats ! XHTML
15997 \begin_inset Index idx
16000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16009 \begin_layout Standard
16010 This file type has the extension
16011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16023 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16024 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16025 When \SpecialChar LyX
16026 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16027 suitable for the purpose.
16028 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16030 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16031 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16034 between different formats, which are described in section
16036 Math Output in XHTML
16041 \begin_inset space ~
16049 \begin_layout Standard
16050 XHTML output remains
16051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16058 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16059 features are supported yet.
16063 and the World Wide Web
16067 Additional Features
16069 manual, for more information.
16072 \begin_layout Standard
16073 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16075 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16076 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16082 \begin_layout Subsection
16084 \begin_inset Index idx
16087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16096 \begin_layout Standard
16097 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16098 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16107 or use the toolbar button
16114 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16115 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16116 \begin_inset space ~
16120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16122 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16126 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16128 \begin_inset space ~
16132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16134 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
16139 Further output formats can be selected via
16141 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16142 View (Other Formats)
16144 or the toolbar button
16153 \begin_layout Standard
16154 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16155 viewer window using the menu
16157 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16162 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16163 Update (Other Formats)
16168 \begin_layout Standard
16169 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16172 To have a real output, export your document.
16175 \begin_layout Section
16176 A few Words about Typography
16177 \begin_inset Index idx
16180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16189 \begin_layout Subsection
16190 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16191 \begin_inset Index idx
16194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16201 \begin_inset Index idx
16204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16213 \begin_layout Standard
16214 In \SpecialChar LyX
16216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16227 character comes in four lengths: the
16239 , and the minus sign:
16240 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16246 \begin_layout Standard
16247 \begin_inset Tabular
16248 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16249 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16250 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16251 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16252 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16253 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16282 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16322 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16347 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16349 \begin_inset space ~
16352 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16359 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16384 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16386 \begin_inset space ~
16389 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16410 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16444 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16450 \begin_layout Standard
16451 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16463 character multiple times in a row.
16464 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16465 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16472 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16484 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16488 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16498 \begin_layout Standard
16499 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16500 math mode and has a length of its own.
16501 Here are some examples:
16504 \begin_layout Enumerate
16505 line- and page-breaks
16506 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16516 \begin_layout Enumerate
16518 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16528 \begin_layout Enumerate
16529 Oh — there's a dash.
16530 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16540 \begin_layout Enumerate
16541 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16545 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16555 \begin_layout Subsection
16557 \begin_inset Index idx
16560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16567 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16569 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16576 \begin_layout Standard
16577 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16578 but automatically in the output.
16579 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16585 \begin_inset Index idx
16588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16595 following the rules of the document language.
16598 \begin_layout Standard
16600 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16604 font and with unusual constructs, like
16605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16613 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16614 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16615 This is done with the menu
16617 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16618 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16620 \begin_inset space ~
16626 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16628 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16632 \begin_layout Standard
16633 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16634 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16645 would then see the hyphen
16646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16653 as a hyphenation possibility.
16654 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16655 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16656 as described in section
16658 Prevent Hyphenation
16663 \begin_inset space ~
16671 \begin_layout Subsection
16673 \begin_inset Index idx
16676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16685 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16686 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16687 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16689 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16696 \begin_layout Standard
16697 When \SpecialChar LyX
16698 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16699 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16701 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16707 appropriate amount of space.
16708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16711 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16713 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16714 gets after another word.
16717 \begin_layout Standard
16718 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16719 not work in all cases.
16721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16732 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16733 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16736 \begin_layout Standard
16737 Here are some examples of
16741 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16744 \begin_layout Itemize
16749 \begin_layout Itemize
16754 \begin_layout Standard
16755 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16758 \begin_layout Itemize
16760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16764 this is too much space!
16767 \begin_layout Itemize
16772 \begin_layout Standard
16773 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16776 \begin_layout Standard
16777 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16780 \begin_layout Enumerate
16784 \begin_inset space ~
16789 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16790 \begin_inset space ~
16794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16796 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16801 \begin_inset Index idx
16804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16805 Spaces ! inter-word
16813 \begin_layout Enumerate
16817 \begin_inset space ~
16822 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16823 \begin_inset space ~
16827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16829 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16834 \begin_inset Index idx
16837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16846 \begin_layout Enumerate
16850 \begin_inset space ~
16854 \begin_inset space ~
16858 \begin_inset space ~
16865 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16867 \begin_inset space ~
16872 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16873 This function is also bound to
16876 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16882 \begin_layout Standard
16883 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16886 \begin_layout Itemize
16888 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16892 \begin_inset space \space{}
16895 this is too much space!
16898 \begin_layout Itemize
16899 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16903 \begin_layout Standard
16904 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16905 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16907 will take care of this.
16910 \begin_layout Standard
16911 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16915 \begin_inset space ~
16921 feature described in the section
16923 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16928 Additional Features
16933 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16935 \begin_inset Index idx
16938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16939 Typography ! Quotes
16945 \begin_inset Index idx
16948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16979 \begin_layout Standard
16981 usually sets quotes correctly.
16982 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16983 and use a closing quote at the end.
16985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16993 The keyboard character,
16997 , generates this automatically.
17000 \begin_layout Standard
17001 You can specify what character the
17005 key produces using the submenu
17011 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17015 \begin_inset Index idx
17018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17019 Document ! Settings
17029 There are six choices:
17032 \begin_layout Labeling
17033 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17056 \begin_layout Labeling
17057 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17060 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17064 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17069 Use quotes like ”this”
17072 \begin_layout Labeling
17073 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17076 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17080 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17086 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17090 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17096 \begin_layout Labeling
17097 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17100 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17104 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17110 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17114 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17120 \begin_layout Labeling
17121 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17124 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17128 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17134 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17138 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17144 \begin_layout Labeling
17145 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17148 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17152 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17158 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17162 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17168 \begin_layout Standard
17169 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
17172 arg "quote-insert single"
17178 \begin_layout Subsection
17180 \begin_inset Index idx
17183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17184 Typography ! Ligatures
17190 \begin_inset Index idx
17193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17222 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17224 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17231 \begin_layout Standard
17232 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17233 print them as single characters.
17234 These groups are known as
17239 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17240 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17242 Here are the standard ligatures:
17245 \begin_layout Itemize
17249 \begin_layout Itemize
17253 \begin_layout Itemize
17257 \begin_layout Itemize
17261 \begin_layout Itemize
17265 \begin_layout Standard
17266 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17269 \begin_layout Standard
17270 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17271 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17279 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17295 To break a ligature, use
17297 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17298 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17300 \begin_inset space ~
17307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17318 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17335 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17343 \begin_layout Subsection
17345 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
17347 \begin_inset Index idx
17350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17358 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17360 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17367 \begin_layout Standard
17370 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17371 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
17375 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
17378 \begin_layout Description
17380 The name of the game.
17383 \begin_layout Description
17385 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
17389 \begin_layout Description
17391 The \SpecialChar TeX
17392 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
17396 \begin_layout Description
17397 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17398 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17402 \begin_layout Standard
17403 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17409 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17417 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17418 world to give programs geek version numbers.
17419 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17420 converges to the number
17421 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17424 : The actual version is
17425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17433 , the previous one was
17434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17445 \begin_layout Subsection
17447 \begin_inset Index idx
17450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17459 \begin_layout Standard
17460 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17461 space between two words.
17462 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17472 for units use the menu
17474 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17475 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17477 \begin_inset space ~
17485 arg "space-insert thin"
17491 \begin_layout Standard
17492 Here is an example to show the differences:
17495 \begin_layout Standard
17496 \begin_inset Tabular
17497 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17498 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17499 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17500 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17507 \begin_inset space ~
17511 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17523 space between number and unit
17530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17535 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17539 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17551 half space between number and unit
17564 \begin_layout Subsection
17566 \begin_inset Index idx
17569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17570 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17578 \begin_layout Standard
17579 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17581 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17582 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17583 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17584 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17585 These bits of text became known as
17596 \begin_layout Standard
17597 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17598 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17599 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17600 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17601 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17602 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17603 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17604 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17605 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17606 \begin_inset Newline newline
17614 \begin_inset Newline newline
17622 \begin_inset Newline newline
17625 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17626 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17627 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17629 \begin_inset space ~
17633 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17635 key "latexcompanion"
17640 \begin_inset space ~
17644 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17650 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17651 's page break mechanism.
17654 \begin_layout Chapter
17655 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17656 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17658 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17665 \begin_layout Standard
17666 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17669 \begin_inset space ~
17675 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17678 \begin_layout Section
17680 \begin_inset Index idx
17683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17690 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17699 \begin_layout Standard
17701 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17704 \begin_layout Description
17707 \begin_inset space ~
17710 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17711 \begin_inset Newline newline
17715 \begin_inset Note Note
17718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17719 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17727 \begin_layout Description
17728 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17729 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17730 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17733 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17734 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17736 \begin_inset space ~
17742 \begin_inset Newline newline
17746 \begin_inset Note Comment
17749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17750 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17759 \begin_layout Description
17761 \begin_inset space ~
17764 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17765 set in the document settings under
17767 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17769 \begin_inset space ~
17775 \begin_inset Newline newline
17779 \begin_inset Newline newline
17783 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17792 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17793 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17798 of a comment that appears in the output.
17804 \begin_inset Newline newline
17808 \begin_inset Newline newline
17811 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17814 \begin_layout Standard
17815 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17823 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17827 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17830 \begin_layout Section
17832 \begin_inset Index idx
17835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17842 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17844 name "sec:Footnotes"
17851 \begin_layout Standard
17853 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17856 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17859 or the toolbar button
17862 arg "footnote-insert"
17874 \begin_inset Graphics
17875 filename clipart/footnote.png
17884 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17885 's representation of your footnote.
17895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17914 label, the box will
17918 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17919 Clicking on the box label again will close
17932 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17933 and click on the footnote
17948 \begin_layout Standard
17949 Here is an example footnote:
17957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17958 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17966 \begin_layout Standard
17967 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17968 position where the footnote box is placed.
17969 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17970 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17971 according to the document class.
17973 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
17974 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17980 ey are described in the
17983 \begin_inset space ~
17991 \begin_layout Section
17993 \begin_inset Index idx
17996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18003 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18005 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
18012 \begin_layout Standard
18013 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
18015 When you insert a margin note via the menu
18017 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18019 \begin_inset space ~
18024 or the toolbar button
18027 arg "marginalnote-insert"
18046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18053 appearing within your text.
18054 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18055 's representation of your margin
18064 \begin_layout Standard
18065 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
18069 \begin_inset Marginal
18072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18074 This is a marginal note.
18082 \begin_layout Standard
18083 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
18084 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
18085 pages, right on odd pages.
18088 \begin_layout Standard
18089 For further information about marginal notes see the section
18092 \begin_inset space ~
18100 \begin_inset space ~
18108 \begin_layout Section
18109 Graphics and Images
18110 \begin_inset Index idx
18113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18120 \begin_inset Index idx
18123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18130 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18132 name "sec:Graphics"
18139 \begin_layout Standard
18140 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18141 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18144 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18149 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18153 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18156 \begin_layout Standard
18157 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18162 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18163 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18165 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18166 \begin_inset space ~
18170 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18172 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18179 \begin_layout Standard
18184 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18185 of the image in the output.
18186 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18190 \begin_inset space ~
18194 \begin_inset space ~
18203 \begin_inset space ~
18207 \begin_inset space ~
18211 \begin_inset space ~
18216 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18217 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18225 \begin_layout Standard
18229 \begin_inset space ~
18233 \begin_inset space ~
18238 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18239 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18241 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18246 \begin_inset space ~
18251 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18252 with the image size is printed.
18255 \begin_layout Standard
18256 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18257 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18259 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18262 \begin_layout Standard
18264 \begin_inset Graphics
18265 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18273 \begin_layout Standard
18274 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18275 the image into a float, see section
18276 \begin_inset space ~
18280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18282 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18289 \begin_layout Subsection
18291 \begin_inset Index idx
18294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18301 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18303 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18310 \begin_layout Standard
18311 You can insert images in any known file format.
18312 But as we explained in section
18313 \begin_inset space ~
18317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18319 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18323 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18325 therefore uses the program
18329 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18330 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18331 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18332 \begin_inset space ~
18336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18338 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18345 \begin_layout Standard
18346 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18349 \begin_layout Description
18351 \begin_inset space ~
18354 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18355 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18356 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18360 Graphics Interchange Format
18361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18364 (GIF, file extension
18365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18377 \begin_inset Index idx
18380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18412 Portable Network Graphics
18413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18416 (PNG, file extension
18417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18429 \begin_inset Index idx
18432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18464 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18468 (JPG, file extension
18469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18493 \begin_inset Index idx
18496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18527 \begin_layout Description
18529 \begin_inset space ~
18532 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18534 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18535 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18536 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18537 \begin_inset Newline newline
18540 Scalable image formats can be
18541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18544 Scalable Vector Graphics
18545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18548 (SVG, file extension
18549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18561 \begin_inset Index idx
18564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18596 Encapsulated PostScript
18597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18600 (EPS, file extension
18601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18613 \begin_inset Index idx
18616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18648 Portable Document Format
18649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18652 (PDF, file extension
18653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18665 \begin_inset Index idx
18668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18683 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18684 result will not be scalable.
18685 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18691 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18699 \begin_layout Standard
18700 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18707 \begin_layout Subsection
18708 Grouping of Image Settings
18709 \begin_inset Index idx
18712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18713 Images ! Settings grouping
18721 \begin_layout Standard
18722 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18724 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18725 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18727 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18728 need to manually change each of them.
18732 \begin_layout Standard
18733 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18736 \begin_inset space ~
18740 \begin_inset space ~
18752 \begin_inset space ~
18756 \begin_inset space ~
18762 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18763 and checking the name of the desired group.
18766 \begin_layout Section
18768 \begin_inset Index idx
18771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18778 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18787 \begin_layout Standard
18788 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18791 arg "tabular-insert"
18796 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18800 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18801 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18802 from the rest of the table.
18803 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18804 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18806 Here is an example table:
18809 \begin_layout Standard
18811 \begin_inset Tabular
18812 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18813 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18814 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18815 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18816 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18817 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19017 \begin_layout Subsection
19021 \begin_layout Standard
19022 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
19025 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
19029 This brings up the table dialog.
19030 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
19031 cursor is placed currently.
19032 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
19033 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
19034 done on all of your selection.
19037 \begin_layout Standard
19038 In addition to the table dialog, the
19041 \begin_inset space ~
19046 helps you in setting table properties.
19047 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
19050 \begin_layout Standard
19054 \begin_inset space ~
19059 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
19060 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
19061 current cell respectively.
19062 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
19064 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
19065 of text, see section
19066 \begin_inset space ~
19070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19072 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
19079 \begin_layout Standard
19080 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19081 using the check box
19090 This will merge the cells to
19094 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19095 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19096 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19097 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19098 in the last row without the upper border:
19101 \begin_layout Standard
19103 \begin_inset Tabular
19104 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19105 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19106 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19107 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19108 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19109 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19120 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19129 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19205 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19240 \begin_layout Standard
19241 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19242 -arguments for the table.
19243 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19244 explained in the chapter
19251 \begin_inset space ~
19257 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19258 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19259 but are visible in the output.
19262 \begin_layout Standard
19263 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19271 Most DVI-viewers are
19275 able to display rotations.
19283 \begin_layout Standard
19288 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19293 adds lines for all cell borders.
19296 \begin_layout Subsection
19298 \begin_inset Index idx
19301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19302 Tables ! Multi-page
19308 \begin_inset Index idx
19311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19320 \begin_layout Standard
19321 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19324 \begin_inset space ~
19328 \begin_inset space ~
19336 \begin_inset space ~
19341 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19342 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19345 \begin_layout Description
19350 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19351 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19352 except for the first page, if
19355 \begin_inset space ~
19363 \begin_layout Description
19367 \begin_inset space ~
19372 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19373 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19376 \begin_layout Description
19381 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19382 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19383 except for the last page, if
19386 \begin_inset space ~
19394 \begin_layout Description
19398 \begin_inset space ~
19403 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19404 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19407 \begin_layout Description
19408 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19409 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19411 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19415 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
19418 \begin_inset space ~
19426 \begin_layout Standard
19427 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19428 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19429 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19435 In this context, first means first in this order:
19438 \begin_inset space ~
19450 \begin_inset space ~
19455 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19458 \begin_layout Standard
19460 \begin_inset Tabular
19461 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19462 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19463 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19464 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19465 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19466 <row endfirsthead="true">
19467 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19473 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19478 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19487 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19497 <row endfirsthead="true">
19498 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19509 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19518 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19530 <row endhead="true">
19531 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19542 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19551 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19561 <row endhead="true">
19562 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19573 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19582 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19594 <row endfoot="true">
19595 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19606 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19615 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19646 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20587 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20596 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20605 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20616 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20647 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20678 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20709 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20740 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20771 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20802 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20833 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20864 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20895 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20926 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20957 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20988 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21019 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21050 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21081 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21112 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21143 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21174 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21205 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21236 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21267 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21298 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21329 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21360 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21391 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21422 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21453 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21484 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21515 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21546 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21576 <row endlastfoot="true">
21577 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21588 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21597 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21614 \begin_layout Subsection
21616 \begin_inset Index idx
21619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21628 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21635 \begin_layout Standard
21636 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21637 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21638 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21639 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21643 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21646 \begin_layout Standard
21647 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21648 for the column in the table dialog.
21649 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21650 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21654 \begin_layout Standard
21656 \begin_inset Tabular
21657 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21658 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21659 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21660 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21661 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21681 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21750 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21806 This is longer now.
21811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21862 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21863 This is longer now.
21868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21894 \begin_layout Standard
21895 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21896 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21901 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21902 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21908 Selection with the mouse or with
21912 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21913 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21914 the selection from outside the table.
21917 \begin_layout Section
21919 \begin_inset Index idx
21922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21929 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21938 \begin_layout Subsection
21942 \begin_layout Standard
21943 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21944 have a fixed location.
21946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21953 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21961 \begin_inset space ~
21966 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21967 too many notes on the current page.
21970 \begin_layout Standard
21971 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21972 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21973 and pages without text.
21974 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21975 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21976 Floats are therefore numbered.
21977 Referencing is described in section
21978 \begin_inset space ~
21982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21984 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21991 \begin_layout Standard
21992 To insert a float, use the menu
21994 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21998 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21999 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
22001 After the label you can insert the caption text.
22002 \begin_inset Index idx
22005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22011 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
22012 paragraph within the float.
22013 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
22014 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
22015 left-clicking on the box label.
22016 A closed float box looks like this:
22017 \begin_inset Graphics
22018 filename clipart/float.png
22023 – a gray button with a red label.
22026 \begin_layout Standard
22027 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
22029 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
22032 \begin_layout Subsection
22034 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22036 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22041 \begin_inset Index idx
22044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22045 Floats ! Figure floats
22053 \begin_layout Standard
22055 \begin_inset space ~
22059 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22061 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22065 was created using the menu
22067 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22068 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22074 arg "float-insert figure"
22078 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22081 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22087 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22091 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22092 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22094 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
22096 \begin_inset space ~
22104 arg "layout-paragraph"
22110 \begin_layout Standard
22111 \begin_inset Float figure
22116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22118 \begin_inset Graphics
22119 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22129 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22134 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22138 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22151 \begin_layout Standard
22152 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22153 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22155 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22164 ) and refer to it using the menu
22166 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22172 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22176 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22177 vague references like
22178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22185 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22186 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22196 For more about cross-references, see section
22197 \begin_inset space ~
22201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22203 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22210 \begin_layout Standard
22211 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22212 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22213 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22214 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22215 as described in section
22216 \begin_inset space ~
22220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22222 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22228 \begin_inset space ~
22232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22234 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22238 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22239 You can also set the images one below the other.
22241 \begin_inset space ~
22245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22247 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22254 reference "fig:Platypus"
22258 are the subfigures.
22261 \begin_layout Standard
22262 \begin_inset Float figure
22267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22268 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22272 \begin_inset Float figure
22277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22278 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22281 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22283 name "fig:Undefinable"
22295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22296 \begin_inset Graphics
22297 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22308 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22312 \begin_inset Float figure
22317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22318 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22321 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22323 name "fig:Platypus"
22335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22336 \begin_inset Graphics
22337 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22349 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22356 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22359 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22361 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22365 Two distorted images.
22378 \begin_layout Subsection
22380 \begin_inset Index idx
22383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22384 Floats ! Table floats
22392 \begin_layout Standard
22393 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22395 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22396 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22399 or the toolbar button
22402 arg "float-insert table"
22406 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22407 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22408 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22410 \begin_inset space ~
22414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22416 reference "tab:Table-float"
22423 \begin_layout Standard
22424 \begin_inset Float table
22429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22430 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22433 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22435 name "tab:Table-float"
22447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22449 \begin_inset Tabular
22450 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22451 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22452 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22453 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22454 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22581 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22602 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22605 \end{array}\right]$
22613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22626 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22647 \begin_layout Subsection
22649 \begin_inset Index idx
22652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22661 \begin_layout Standard
22663 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22664 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22665 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22667 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22675 \begin_inset space ~
22683 \begin_layout Section
22685 \begin_inset Index idx
22688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22697 \begin_layout Standard
22699 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22701 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22702 \begin_inset space \space{}
22709 \begin_layout Standard
22710 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22711 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22713 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22717 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22718 and its alignment within the page.
22721 \begin_layout Standard
22723 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22733 height_special "totalheight"
22738 backgroundcolor "none"
22741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22744 This is a minipage.
22745 The text is set in an italic style.
22748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22751 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22752 another formatting.
22760 \begin_layout Standard
22761 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22764 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22768 as described in section
22769 \begin_inset space ~
22773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22775 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22780 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22786 \begin_layout Standard
22787 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22797 height_special "totalheight"
22802 backgroundcolor "none"
22805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22806 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22807 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22813 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22817 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22827 height_special "totalheight"
22832 backgroundcolor "none"
22835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22836 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22837 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22845 \begin_layout Standard
22846 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22852 \begin_layout Standard
22853 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22855 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22862 \begin_inset space ~
22870 \begin_layout Chapter
22871 Mathematical Formulas
22872 \begin_inset Index idx
22875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22882 \begin_inset Index idx
22885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22914 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22916 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22923 \begin_layout Standard
22924 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22929 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22932 \begin_layout Section
22934 \begin_inset Index idx
22937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22946 \begin_layout Standard
22947 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22960 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22962 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22963 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22964 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22966 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22972 \begin_layout Standard
22973 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22977 \begin_inset space ~
22982 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22985 \begin_layout Standard
22986 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22987 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22990 \begin_layout Standard
22991 This is a line with an inline formula
22992 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22998 \begin_layout Standard
22999 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
23000 paragraph, like this one:
23001 \begin_inset Formula
23008 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
23011 \begin_layout Standard
23013 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
23015 For example, typing
23016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23029 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
23030 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
23034 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
23037 \begin_inset space ~
23045 \begin_layout Subsection
23046 Navigating in Formulas
23047 \begin_inset Index idx
23050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23059 \begin_layout Standard
23060 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
23061 achieved with the arrow keys.
23063 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
23064 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
23069 will leave a formula construct (a square root
23070 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
23074 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
23078 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23081 \end{array}\right]$
23089 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
23094 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
23095 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
23098 \begin_layout Standard
23103 , printed in this document as
23104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23108 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23115 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23116 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23117 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23122 For example, if you want
23123 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23131 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23141 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23145 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23150 , since in the latter case only the
23153 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23158 will be under the square root sign:
23159 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23165 \begin_layout Standard
23166 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23168 \begin_inset Formula
23170 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23179 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23180 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23183 \begin_layout Subsection
23187 \begin_layout Standard
23188 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23189 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23193 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23194 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23195 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23196 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23197 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23201 \begin_layout Subsection
23202 Exponents and Subscripts
23203 \begin_inset Index idx
23206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23213 \begin_inset Index idx
23216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23225 \begin_layout Standard
23226 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23229 arg "math-superscript"
23235 arg "math-subscript"
23238 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23240 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23243 , type in a formula
23246 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23256 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23262 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23266 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23272 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23278 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23287 , you have to use an extra
23291 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23292 For example, if you want
23293 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23299 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23305 Subscripts are similar: To get
23306 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23312 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23320 \begin_layout Subsection
23322 \begin_inset Index idx
23325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23334 \begin_layout Standard
23335 Create a fraction either with the command
23341 or by using the icon
23344 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23350 \begin_inset space ~
23356 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23357 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23358 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23363 To move back up, press
23368 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23369 \begin_inset Formula
23371 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23374 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23382 \begin_layout Subsection
23384 \begin_inset Index idx
23387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23396 \begin_layout Standard
23397 Roots can be created using the
23400 \begin_inset space ~
23408 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23414 arg "math-insert \\root"
23436 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23442 always produces a square root.
23445 \begin_layout Subsection
23446 Operators with Limits
23447 \begin_inset Index idx
23450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23457 \begin_inset Index idx
23460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23467 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23469 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23476 \begin_layout Standard
23478 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23482 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23485 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23486 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23487 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23488 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23489 The sum operator will automatically place its
23490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23497 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23499 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23503 \begin_inset Formula
23505 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23510 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23514 \begin_layout Standard
23515 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23517 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23518 behind the operator and using the menu
23520 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23521 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23523 \begin_inset space ~
23527 \begin_inset space ~
23541 \begin_layout Standard
23542 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23551 \begin_inset Index idx
23554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23561 \begin_inset Formula
23563 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23568 which will place the
23569 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23581 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23582 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23588 \begin_layout Standard
23589 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23596 Have a look at section
23597 \begin_inset space ~
23601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23603 reference "subsec:Functions"
23607 for an explanation of function macros.
23610 \begin_layout Subsection
23612 \begin_inset Index idx
23615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23624 \begin_layout Standard
23625 Most math symbols can be found in the
23628 \begin_inset space ~
23633 under one of several categories; including
23650 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23654 \begin_layout Standard
23655 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23656 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23657 don't have to use the
23660 \begin_inset space ~
23665 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23667 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23670 \begin_layout Subsection
23672 \begin_inset Index idx
23675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23684 \begin_layout Standard
23685 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23691 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23697 \begin_inset space ~
23705 arg "math-insert \\space"
23709 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23710 For example, the sequence
23715 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23718 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23720 \begin_inset Graphics
23721 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23726 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23727 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23728 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23729 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23730 , because they are negative
23732 Here are two examples:
23735 \begin_layout Standard
23745 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23751 \begin_layout Standard
23761 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23767 \begin_layout Subsection
23769 \begin_inset Index idx
23772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23779 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23781 name "subsec:Functions"
23788 \begin_layout Standard
23792 \begin_inset space ~
23797 contains under the button
23800 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23803 a number of function macros, such as
23804 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23808 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23816 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23823 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23824 avoid confusions, because
23825 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23829 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23835 \begin_layout Standard
23836 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23838 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23842 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23848 \begin_layout Standard
23849 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23850 are placed, as described in section
23851 \begin_inset space ~
23855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23857 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23864 \begin_layout Subsection
23866 \begin_inset Index idx
23869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23878 \begin_layout Standard
23879 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23881 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23882 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
23883 commands, for example, to enter
23884 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23887 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23888 Our example is entered by typing
23893 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23900 \begin_inset space ~
23904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23906 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23910 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23913 \begin_layout Standard
23914 \begin_inset Float table
23919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23920 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23923 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23925 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23929 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23939 \begin_inset Tabular
23940 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23941 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23942 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23943 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23944 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24028 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24082 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
24092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24136 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24190 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24244 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24298 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24352 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24406 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24460 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24505 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24526 \begin_layout Standard
24527 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24530 \begin_inset space ~
24538 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24541 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24545 \begin_layout Section
24546 Brackets and Delimiters
24547 \begin_inset Index idx
24550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24557 \begin_inset Index idx
24560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24567 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24569 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24576 \begin_layout Standard
24577 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24579 For some purposes, using just the keys
24584 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24585 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24586 toolbar delimiter icon
24589 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24593 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24594 \begin_inset Formula
24596 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24604 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24605 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24609 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24612 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24618 \begin_inset Formula
24620 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24628 \begin_layout Standard
24629 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24630 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24634 \begin_layout Standard
24635 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24636 left side and right side.
24637 If you use the option
24640 \begin_inset space ~
24645 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24646 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24648 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24653 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24654 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24657 \begin_layout Standard
24658 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24659 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24660 is to go inside the brackets.
24661 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24666 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24667 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24668 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24672 arg "math-delim ( )"
24678 \begin_layout Section
24679 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24680 \begin_inset Index idx
24683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24690 \begin_inset Index idx
24693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24700 \begin_inset Index idx
24703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24704 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24712 \begin_layout Standard
24713 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24717 \begin_inset space ~
24725 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24729 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24730 Here is an example:
24731 \begin_inset Formula
24733 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24742 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24743 \begin_inset space ~
24747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24749 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24754 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24755 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24756 This alignment is set in the box
24761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24810 for every column as default.
24811 For example, the sequence
24812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24823 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24824 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24825 corresponds to the relevant column.
24826 The result will look like this:
24827 \begin_inset Formula
24830 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24831 column & has & has\,right\\
24832 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24841 \begin_layout Standard
24842 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24845 arg "newline-insert newline"
24848 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24849 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24851 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24854 or the math toolbar.
24857 \begin_layout Standard
24858 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24859 It can be created with the menu
24861 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24862 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24864 \begin_inset space ~
24876 Here is an example:
24877 \begin_inset Formula
24891 \begin_layout Standard
24892 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24895 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24898 arg "newline-insert newline"
24902 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24907 arg "newline-insert newline"
24910 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24918 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24919 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24920 A new row is created by every further entry of
24923 arg "newline-insert newline"
24927 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24928 Here is an example:
24929 \begin_inset Formula
24931 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24932 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24937 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24938 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24939 \begin_inset Formula
24941 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24949 \begin_layout Standard
24950 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24957 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24958 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24961 reference "eq:asquared"
24966 The other types are described in section
24967 \begin_inset space ~
24971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24973 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24980 \begin_layout Section
24981 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24982 \begin_inset Index idx
24985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24986 Math ! Formula numbering
24992 \begin_inset Index idx
24995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24996 Math ! Referencing formulas
25002 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25004 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25011 \begin_layout Standard
25012 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
25014 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25015 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25017 \begin_inset space ~
25021 \begin_inset space ~
25029 arg "math-number-toggle"
25033 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25034 within parentheses.
25035 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
25036 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
25037 the document class.
25038 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
25039 separated by a dot:
25040 \begin_inset Formula
25050 arg "math-number-toggle"
25053 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
25054 You can only number displayed formulas.
25057 \begin_layout Standard
25058 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
25060 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25061 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25063 \begin_inset space ~
25067 \begin_inset space ~
25075 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
25078 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
25079 \begin_inset Formula
25082 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
25088 To number all lines use the shortcut
25091 arg "math-number-toggle"
25097 \begin_layout Standard
25098 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25101 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
25102 A label is inserted with the menu
25104 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25113 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
25114 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
25115 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25127 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25128 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25129 We inserted in the following example the label
25130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25137 in the second line:
25138 \begin_inset Formula
25140 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25141 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25146 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25147 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25148 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25150 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25152 \begin_inset space ~
25160 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25164 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25165 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25166 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25167 as the formula number:
25170 \begin_layout Standard
25171 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25174 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25181 \begin_layout Standard
25182 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25183 's cross-reference box are described in section
25184 \begin_inset space ~
25188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25190 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25195 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25203 \begin_layout Section
25204 User defined math macros
25205 \begin_inset Index idx
25208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25217 \begin_layout Standard
25219 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25220 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25221 Math macros are explained in section
25224 \begin_inset space ~
25236 \begin_layout Section
25240 \begin_layout Subsection
25242 \begin_inset Index idx
25245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25254 \begin_layout Standard
25255 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25256 To set a font in a formula, use the
25259 \begin_inset space ~
25267 arg "math-insert \\font"
25270 , or enter its command, listed in table
25271 \begin_inset space ~
25275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25277 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25284 \begin_layout Standard
25285 \begin_inset Float table
25290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25291 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25294 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25296 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25300 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25310 \begin_inset Tabular
25311 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25312 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25313 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25314 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25346 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25373 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25400 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25433 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25460 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25487 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25521 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25548 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25582 \begin_layout Standard
25583 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25591 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25607 \begin_layout Standard
25608 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25609 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25614 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25615 space when you need a space in the box.
25616 Here is an example where
25617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25628 denotes the set of numbers:
25629 \begin_inset Formula
25631 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25639 \begin_layout Standard
25640 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25641 You can, for example, put a character in
25650 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25654 \begin_inset Newline newline
25657 So it is better not to use this feature.
25660 \begin_layout Standard
25661 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25662 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25666 \begin_inset Newline newline
25669 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25675 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25676 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25682 \begin_layout Standard
25689 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25692 \begin_layout Standard
25693 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25695 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25696 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25698 \begin_inset space ~
25706 \begin_layout Subsection
25708 \begin_inset Index idx
25711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25720 \begin_layout Standard
25721 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25723 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25727 \begin_inset space ~
25731 \begin_inset space ~
25739 \begin_inset space ~
25747 arg "math-insert \\font"
25751 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25752 in black instead of blue.
25753 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25754 Here is an example:
25755 \begin_inset Formula
25758 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25759 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25768 \begin_layout Subsection
25770 \begin_inset Index idx
25773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25782 \begin_layout Standard
25783 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25784 automatically chosen in most situations.
25802 For most characters,
25810 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25811 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25816 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25817 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25818 thinks are appropriate.
25819 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25822 arg "math-insert \\style"
25826 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25827 For example, you can set
25828 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25831 , which is normally in
25840 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25844 The four styles are used in the following example:
25847 \begin_layout Standard
25848 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25852 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25856 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25860 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25866 \begin_layout Standard
25867 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25868 is set in a particular size with the menu
25870 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25872 \begin_inset space ~
25877 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25878 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25879 will be adjusted to correspond.
25880 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25891 \begin_layout Standard
25895 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25901 \begin_layout Section
25902 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25904 \begin_inset Index idx
25907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25914 \begin_inset Index idx
25917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25926 \begin_layout Standard
25928 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
25929 that are in common use.
25932 \begin_layout Subsection
25933 Enabling AMS-Support
25936 \begin_layout Standard
25937 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25938 the document by selecting the checkbox
25941 \begin_inset space ~
25945 \begin_inset space ~
25949 \begin_inset space ~
25956 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25960 \begin_inset Index idx
25963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25964 Document ! Settings
25972 \begin_inset space ~
25978 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25979 -errors in formulas,
25980 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25983 \begin_layout Subsection
25985 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25987 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25992 \begin_inset Index idx
25995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25996 Math ! Multi-line Equations
26004 \begin_layout Standard
26005 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26006 provides a selection of different formula types.
26008 allows you to choose between
26029 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
26030 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26036 , for an explanation of these formula types.
26039 \begin_layout Chapter
26043 \begin_layout Section
26045 \begin_inset Index idx
26048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26055 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26057 name "sec:Cross-References"
26064 \begin_layout Standard
26065 One of \SpecialChar LyX
26066 's strengths is cross-references.
26067 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
26069 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
26070 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
26071 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
26074 \begin_layout Enumerate
26078 \begin_layout Enumerate
26079 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26081 name "enu:Second-item"
26088 \begin_layout Enumerate
26092 \begin_layout Standard
26093 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
26095 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26098 or by pressing the toolbar button
26105 A gray label box like this:
26106 \begin_inset Graphics
26107 filename clipart/label.png
26111 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
26113 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
26115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26148 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26149 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26165 \begin_layout Standard
26166 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26168 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26171 or the toolbar button
26174 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26178 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26179 \begin_inset Graphics
26180 filename clipart/reference.png
26184 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26186 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26199 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26203 \begin_layout Standard
26204 As an alternative to
26206 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26209 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26214 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26215 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26217 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26229 \begin_layout Standard
26230 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26231 \begin_inset space ~
26235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26237 reference "enu:Second-item"
26244 \begin_layout Standard
26245 It is recommended to use a protected space
26249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26250 described in section
26251 \begin_inset space ~
26255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26257 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26266 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26267 line breaks between them.
26270 \begin_layout Standard
26271 There are six formats of cross-references:
26274 \begin_layout Description
26275 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26278 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26285 \begin_layout Description
26286 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26287 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26299 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26306 \begin_layout Description
26307 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26308 \begin_inset space ~
26312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26313 LatexCommand pageref
26314 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26321 \begin_layout Description
26323 \begin_inset space ~
26327 \begin_inset space ~
26330 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26332 LatexCommand vpageref
26333 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26338 \begin_inset Newline newline
26341 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26342 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26343 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26344 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26345 it prints “on the next page”.
26346 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26349 \begin_layout Description
26351 \begin_inset space ~
26355 \begin_inset space ~
26359 \begin_inset space ~
26362 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26365 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26370 \begin_inset Newline newline
26373 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26379 ; otherwise it behaves like
26383 \begin_inset space ~
26387 \begin_inset space ~
26396 \begin_layout Description
26398 \begin_inset space ~
26401 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26402 \begin_inset Newline newline
26406 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26414 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26424 \begin_inset Index idx
26427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26429 -packages ! prettyref
26435 \begin_inset Index idx
26438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26440 -packages ! refstyle
26451 \begin_inset Newline newline
26454 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26455 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26458 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26462 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26463 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26471 is the default and preferred because
26475 supports only English documents.
26476 The format is specified by using the command
26488 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26489 preamble of the document.
26490 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26503 ) can be done with this command
26504 \begin_inset Newline newline
26511 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26516 \begin_inset Newline newline
26519 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26521 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26523 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26530 \begin_layout Description
26532 \begin_inset space ~
26535 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26537 LatexCommand nameref
26538 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26545 \begin_layout Standard
26546 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26547 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26549 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26553 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26557 \begin_layout Standard
26558 You can only use the style
26562 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26566 is always possible.
26569 \begin_layout Standard
26570 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26571 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26573 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26574 \begin_inset space ~
26578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26580 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26587 \begin_layout Standard
26588 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26592 \begin_inset space ~
26596 \begin_inset space ~
26601 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26602 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26605 \begin_inset space ~
26610 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26611 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26614 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26620 \begin_layout Standard
26621 You can change labels at any time.
26622 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26623 do not need to think about this.
26626 \begin_layout Standard
26627 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26629 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26633 \begin_layout Standard
26634 References are described in detail in the section
26635 \begin_inset space ~
26645 \begin_inset space ~
26653 \begin_layout Section
26654 Table of Contents and other Listings
26655 \begin_inset Index idx
26658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26665 \begin_inset Index idx
26668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26669 Navigating ! Outline
26675 \begin_inset Index idx
26678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26685 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26694 \begin_layout Subsection
26696 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26698 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26705 \begin_layout Standard
26706 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26708 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26709 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26711 \begin_inset space ~
26715 \begin_inset space ~
26721 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26723 If you click on it, the
26727 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26728 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26729 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26731 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26733 \begin_inset space ~
26738 that is described in section
26739 \begin_inset space ~
26743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26745 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26752 \begin_layout Standard
26753 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26754 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26756 \begin_inset space ~
26760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26762 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26766 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26768 \begin_inset space ~
26772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26774 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26778 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26780 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26783 \begin_layout Subsection
26784 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26785 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26787 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26794 \begin_layout Standard
26795 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26797 You can insert them via the
26799 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26803 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26806 \begin_layout Section
26807 URLs and Hyperlinks
26808 \begin_inset Index idx
26811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26818 \begin_inset Index idx
26821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26830 \begin_layout Subsection
26832 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26841 \begin_layout Standard
26842 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26844 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26850 \begin_layout Standard
26851 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
26853 \begin_inset Flex URL
26856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26866 \begin_layout Standard
26867 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26873 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26877 \begin_layout Standard
26878 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26886 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26895 \begin_layout Subsection
26897 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26899 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
26906 \begin_layout Standard
26907 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26909 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26912 or with the toolbar button
26919 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26928 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26929 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26930 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26932 name "LyX's homepage"
26933 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26937 , an Email address like this:
26938 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26940 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26941 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26946 , or a link to a file.
26949 \begin_layout Standard
26950 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26963 to the link target.
26966 \begin_layout Standard
26967 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26968 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26969 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26970 the text style dialog.
26971 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26975 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26977 name "LyX's homepage"
26978 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26985 \begin_layout Standard
26986 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26990 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26992 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26993 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26997 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26999 \begin_inset Newline newline
27007 \begin_inset Newline newline
27014 in the PDF Properties dialog.
27017 \begin_layout Section
27019 \begin_inset Index idx
27022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27029 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27031 name "sec:Appendices"
27038 \begin_layout Standard
27039 Appendices are created with the menu
27041 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27043 \begin_inset space ~
27047 \begin_inset space ~
27053 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
27054 as the appendix part of the book.
27055 This part is marked with a red borderline.
27058 \begin_layout Standard
27059 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
27060 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
27061 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
27062 and the subsection number.
27063 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
27067 \begin_layout Standard
27069 \begin_inset space ~
27073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27075 reference "chap:Credits"
27080 \begin_inset space ~
27084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27086 reference "subsec:Export"
27093 \begin_layout Section
27095 \begin_inset Index idx
27098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27105 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27107 name "sec:Bibliography"
27114 \begin_layout Standard
27115 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
27117 You can include a bibliography database,
27121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27122 Known under the name
27123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27126 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27136 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
27137 manually, using the paragraph environment
27141 , which was described in section
27142 \begin_inset space ~
27146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27148 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
27153 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27154 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27158 use a bibliography database.
27161 \begin_layout Subsection
27162 The Bibliography Environment
27165 \begin_layout Standard
27170 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27172 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27181 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27183 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
27186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27193 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27196 \begin_layout Standard
27197 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27199 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27202 or the toolbar button
27205 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27209 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27210 containing the available citations.
27211 Select one or more keys from the list and
27221 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27222 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27226 \begin_layout Standard
27227 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27228 entry with surrounding brackets.
27233 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27234 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27246 \begin_layout Standard
27250 Companion Second Edition
27253 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27255 key "latexcompanion"
27262 \begin_layout Standard
27263 The \SpecialChar LyX
27264 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27265 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27274 \begin_layout Standard
27275 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27278 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27280 \begin_inset space ~
27288 arg "layout-paragraph"
27292 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27295 \begin_layout Subsection
27296 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27298 \begin_inset Index idx
27301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27302 Bibliography ! Databases
27308 \begin_inset Index idx
27311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27312 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27319 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27321 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27328 \begin_layout Standard
27329 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27335 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27337 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27338 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27343 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27345 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27346 your working field in a database.
27347 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27348 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27349 list for that document.
27350 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27354 \begin_layout Standard
27355 The database is a text file with the file extension
27356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27367 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27368 The format is explained in
27369 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27375 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27377 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27379 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27384 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27385 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27386 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27388 \begin_inset Flex URL
27391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27393 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27401 \begin_layout Standard
27402 To use a database, use the menu
27404 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27409 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27411 \begin_inset space ~
27417 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27418 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27425 Add bibliography to TOC
27427 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27432 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27433 in the document or just the cited references.
27436 \begin_layout Standard
27437 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27449 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27450 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27451 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27452 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27454 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27460 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27461 \begin_inset Newline newline
27465 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27467 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27479 \begin_layout Standard
27480 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27483 \begin_layout Standard
27484 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27485 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27487 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27494 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27495 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27500 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27501 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27502 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27506 The following variants are possible:
27509 \begin_layout Description
27510 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27511 with other bibliography packages (e.
27512 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27516 \begin_inset space \space{}
27523 ), only with the package
27527 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27531 \begin_layout Description
27532 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27533 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27534 with all bibliography packages, except
27539 \begin_layout Description
27540 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27545 , works with all bibliography packages
27548 \begin_layout Standard
27549 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27550 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27552 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27555 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27559 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27568 \begin_layout Standard
27569 When you select the option
27571 Sectioned bibliography
27575 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27576 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27579 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27580 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27582 Customizing Bibliographies
27586 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27591 Additional Features
27596 \begin_layout Standard
27597 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27598 the two methods of creating them.
27599 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27600 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27601 We used the style file
27605 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27608 \begin_layout Subsection
27610 \begin_inset Index idx
27613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27614 Bibliography ! Citation format
27622 \begin_layout Standard
27623 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27624 For this feature you need to enable the option
27630 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27634 \begin_inset Index idx
27637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27638 Document ! Settings
27648 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27649 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27650 style files as explained in
27651 the previous section.
27654 \begin_layout Standard
27655 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27656 the citation reference window.
27657 Here is an example where the text
27658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27662 \begin_inset space ~
27666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27669 appears after the reference:
27672 \begin_layout Standard
27674 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27677 key "latexcompanion"
27684 \begin_layout Section
27686 \begin_inset Index idx
27689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27696 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27705 \begin_layout Standard
27706 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27708 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27710 \begin_inset space ~
27715 or the toolbar button
27722 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27723 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27724 by \SpecialChar LyX
27725 as the index entry.
27728 \begin_layout Standard
27729 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27731 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27732 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27734 \begin_inset space ~
27740 A light blue box labeled
27741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27752 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27753 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27757 \begin_layout Standard
27758 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27759 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27760 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27761 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27763 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27765 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27772 \begin_layout Subsection
27773 Grouping Index Entries
27774 \begin_inset Index idx
27777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27786 \begin_layout Standard
27787 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27789 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27790 lists under the entry
27791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27799 First we create the entry
27800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27808 \begin_inset space ~
27812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27814 reference "subsec:Lists"
27819 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27820 \begin_inset space ~
27824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27826 reference "sec:Itemize"
27830 , we insert the command
27833 \begin_layout Standard
27839 \begin_layout Standard
27843 \begin_layout Standard
27849 \begin_layout Standard
27850 for the enumerated list in section
27851 \begin_inset space ~
27855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27857 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27864 \begin_layout Standard
27865 The exclamation mark
27866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27873 marks the grouping levels.
27874 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27875 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27876 If we don't have an index entry for
27877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27884 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27887 \begin_layout Subsection
27889 \begin_inset Index idx
27892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27893 Index ! Page ranges
27901 \begin_layout Standard
27902 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27904 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27905 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27906 an index entry in section
27907 \begin_inset space ~
27911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27913 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27920 \begin_layout Standard
27923 Paragraph environments|(
27926 \begin_layout Standard
27927 and another entry at the end of section
27928 \begin_inset space ~
27932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27934 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
27941 \begin_layout Standard
27944 Paragraph environments|)
27947 \begin_layout Standard
27949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27972 respectively start and end the index range.
27973 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27974 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27975 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27976 An example is the index entry
27977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27980 Document ! Settings
27981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27987 \begin_layout Subsection
27989 \begin_inset Index idx
27992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27993 Index ! Cross referencing
28001 \begin_layout Standard
28002 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
28003 We referred for example in the index entry
28004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28012 \begin_inset space ~
28016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28018 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
28022 ) to the index entry
28023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28030 in the same section using the entry
28033 \begin_layout Standard
28036 GIF|see{Image formats}
28039 \begin_layout Standard
28040 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
28042 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
28043 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
28046 \begin_layout Subsection
28048 \begin_inset Index idx
28051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28052 Index ! Entry order
28060 \begin_layout Standard
28061 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
28062 follow the rules for the index order.
28063 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
28068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28069 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
28071 \begin_inset space ~
28075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28077 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28086 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
28087 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
28088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28112 \begin_inset Index idx
28115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28116 Dummy entries ! maïs
28122 \begin_inset Index idx
28125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28126 Dummy entries ! maître
28132 \begin_inset Index idx
28135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28136 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
28141 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
28142 maïs, maison, maître.
28143 To achieve this, we use the command
28146 \begin_layout Standard
28149 previous entry@current entry
28152 \begin_layout Standard
28153 In our case we want to have
28154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28169 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28172 \begin_layout Standard
28178 \begin_layout Standard
28179 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28180 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
28182 See the next subsection for an example.
28185 \begin_layout Standard
28186 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28192 \begin_layout Standard
28193 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28198 to generate the index (see section
28199 \begin_inset space ~
28203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28205 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28214 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28215 -package aeguill in section
28216 \begin_inset space ~
28220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28222 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28226 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28227 -packages although all these index
28228 commands start with
28229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28242 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28247 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28250 \begin_layout Standard
28262 \begin_layout Standard
28274 \begin_layout Subsection
28276 \begin_inset Index idx
28279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28280 Index ! Entry layout
28288 \begin_layout Standard
28289 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28290 \begin_inset Index idx
28293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28296 This is an italic dummy entry
28301 You can also format the page number using the character
28302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28309 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28310 -command without a backslash.
28311 We can write for example
28314 \begin_layout Standard
28317 italic page number:|textit
28320 \begin_layout Standard
28321 to get the page number in italic.
28322 \begin_inset Index idx
28325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28326 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28331 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28332 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28350 \begin_inset space ~
28356 Have a look at section
28357 \begin_inset space ~
28361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28363 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28367 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28371 \begin_layout Standard
28372 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28380 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28384 to generate the index, see section
28385 \begin_inset space ~
28389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28391 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28400 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28405 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28406 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28409 key "latexcompanion"
28421 \begin_layout Standard
28422 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28424 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28425 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28426 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28427 If so, put the following in the preamble
28430 \begin_layout Standard
28442 \begin_layout Standard
28446 \begin_layout Standard
28452 \begin_layout Standard
28453 in the index entry.
28454 \begin_inset Index idx
28457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28458 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28463 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28464 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28465 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28468 \begin_layout Standard
28469 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28470 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28471 a bold font for all index entries.
28472 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28484 documentation for details,
28485 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28487 key "makeindex,xindy"
28494 \begin_layout Subsection
28496 \begin_inset Index idx
28499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28506 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28508 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28515 \begin_layout Standard
28516 If the index generation program
28520 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28521 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28525 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28526 distribution, is used.
28530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28535 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28536 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28537 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28538 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28539 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28549 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28551 dialog, see section
28552 \begin_inset space ~
28556 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28558 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28563 The available options are listed and explained in
28564 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28566 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
28571 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28575 \begin_layout Standard
28576 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28577 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28580 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28581 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28585 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28586 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28589 \begin_layout Subsection
28593 \begin_layout Standard
28594 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28595 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28603 next to the standard index.
28605 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28606 that add this feature.
28613 \begin_inset Index idx
28616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28618 -packages ! splitidx
28623 package to generate multiple indexes.
28624 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28630 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28632 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28639 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28640 style, but it also includes
28641 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28642 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28650 \begin_layout Standard
28651 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28652 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28654 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28655 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28658 and select the option
28660 Use multiple Indexes
28667 already contains the standard index
28668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28676 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28677 also appear as a heading) to the
28681 input field and press the
28686 The new index now also appears in the list.
28687 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28688 label color to the new index.
28691 \begin_layout Standard
28692 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28695 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28702 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28703 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28704 are additional features:
28707 \begin_layout Itemize
28708 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28709 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28712 \begin_layout Itemize
28713 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28714 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28722 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28723 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28724 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28725 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28728 \begin_layout Section
28729 Nomenclature/Glossary
28730 \begin_inset Index idx
28733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28740 \begin_inset Index idx
28743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28772 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28774 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28781 \begin_layout Standard
28782 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28783 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28784 called nomenclature or glossary.
28787 \begin_layout Standard
28788 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28795 \begin_inset Index idx
28798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28800 -packages ! nomencl
28806 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28808 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28814 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28818 \begin_layout Standard
28819 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28820 and then use the menu
28822 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28828 \begin_inset space ~
28833 or the toolbar button
28836 arg "nomencl-insert"
28841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28852 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28855 \begin_layout Standard
28856 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28857 The first is the term or
28861 that you wish to define.
28866 of the term or symbol.
28869 \begin_layout Standard
28870 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28878 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
28879 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28887 \begin_layout Subsection
28888 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28889 \begin_inset Index idx
28892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28893 Nomenclature ! Layout
28901 \begin_layout Standard
28902 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28906 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28913 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28921 \begin_inset Newline newline
28929 \begin_inset Newline newline
28935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28942 character starts/ends the formula.
28943 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
28944 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
28946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28956 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28966 \begin_layout Standard
28967 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28968 -syntax is given in section
28969 \begin_inset space ~
28973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28975 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28982 \begin_layout Standard
28986 \begin_inset space ~
28991 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28993 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28998 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29005 in this document is:
29006 \begin_inset Newline newline
29011 dummy entry for the character
29016 \begin_inset Newline newline
29028 \begin_inset space ~
29038 font use the command
29067 \begin_layout Standard
29068 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
29069 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29073 \begin_inset space \space{}
29077 \begin_inset Newline newline
29093 \begin_inset Newline newline
29096 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
29097 This command will make the font of all symbols
29104 \begin_inset space ~
29112 \begin_layout Standard
29113 If the characters |
29114 \begin_inset space \space{}
29118 \begin_inset space \space{}
29122 \begin_inset space \space{}
29126 \begin_inset space \space{}
29130 \begin_inset space \space{}
29133 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
29134 a quote character in front of them.
29135 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29136 LatexCommand nomenclature
29137 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
29138 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
29145 \begin_layout Subsection
29146 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
29147 \begin_inset Index idx
29150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29151 Nomenclature ! Sort order
29159 \begin_layout Standard
29160 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29161 -code of the symbol
29163 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
29165 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
29168 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29169 LatexCommand nomenclature
29171 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
29178 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29182 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29183 LatexCommand nomenclature
29186 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29191 They will be sorted by
29192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29218 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29221 will be sorted before the
29225 since the character
29226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29233 is considered in sorting.
29236 \begin_layout Standard
29237 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29240 \begin_inset space ~
29245 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29246 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29248 For the example given, you can insert
29252 in this field for the
29253 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29260 will be located before
29261 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29267 \begin_layout Standard
29268 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29273 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29282 \begin_layout Subsection
29283 Nomenclature Options
29284 \begin_inset Index idx
29287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29288 Nomenclature ! Options
29296 \begin_layout Standard
29301 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29302 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29305 \begin_layout Description
29306 refeq Appends the phrase
29307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29322 to every nomenclature entry, where
29328 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29331 \begin_layout Description
29332 refpage Appends the phrase
29333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29348 to every nomenclature entry, where
29354 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29357 \begin_layout Description
29358 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29361 \begin_layout Standard
29362 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29363 class options list in the
29365 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29369 In this document the options
29376 \begin_layout Standard
29377 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29383 \begin_layout Standard
29384 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29385 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29390 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29393 \begin_layout Description
29403 \begin_layout Description
29406 nomrefpage Like the
29413 \begin_layout Description
29416 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29425 \begin_layout Description
29429 \begin_inset space ~
29435 \begin_inset space ~
29440 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29443 \begin_layout Standard
29445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29452 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29453 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29457 \begin_layout Standard
29465 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29468 \begin_inset Newline newline
29475 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29480 \begin_inset Newline newline
29484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29499 by their translation.
29502 \begin_layout Subsection
29503 Printing the Nomenclature
29504 \begin_inset Index idx
29507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29508 Nomenclature ! Printing
29516 \begin_layout Standard
29517 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29519 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29520 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29536 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29537 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29538 You can choose between these settings:
29541 \begin_layout Description
29542 Default a space of 1
29543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29549 \begin_layout Description
29551 \begin_inset space ~
29555 \begin_inset space ~
29558 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29561 \begin_layout Description
29562 Custom custom space
29565 \begin_layout Standard
29566 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29575 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29583 For example, in order to change the name to
29587 , add the following line to the preamble:
29590 \begin_layout Standard
29598 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29601 \begin_layout Subsection
29602 Nomenclature Program
29603 \begin_inset Index idx
29606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29607 Nomenclature ! Program
29613 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29615 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29622 \begin_layout Standard
29628 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29629 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29631 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29636 by adding options, see section
29637 \begin_inset space ~
29641 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29643 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29648 The available options are listed and explained in
29649 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29651 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29658 \begin_layout Section
29660 \begin_inset Index idx
29663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29670 \begin_inset Index idx
29673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29674 Document ! Branches
29680 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29682 name "sec:Branches"
29689 \begin_layout Standard
29690 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29691 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29692 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29693 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29696 \begin_layout Standard
29697 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29698 allows you to put text into branches.
29699 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29700 To create a branch, either select the menu
29702 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29703 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29706 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29708 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29715 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29716 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29717 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29718 and whether the name of the branch should
29719 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29720 (see below for an example).
29721 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29722 to the name of the other) and to add
29723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29731 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29735 \begin_inset space ~
29738 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29739 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29742 \begin_layout Standard
29743 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29744 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29746 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29749 where you can choose a branch.
29750 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29754 \begin_layout Standard
29755 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29756 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29759 \begin_layout Standard
29760 \begin_inset Branch Question
29763 \begin_layout Standard
29764 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29772 \begin_layout Standard
29773 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29776 \begin_layout Standard
29777 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29785 \begin_layout Standard
29792 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29793 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29796 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29797 Consider for example a file
29798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29805 which has the above branches.
29807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29814 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29838 branch were inactive,
29839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29854 branch was active, likewise
29855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29870 branch was active, and
29871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29874 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29878 if both branches were active.
29879 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29882 \begin_layout Standard
29883 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29889 \begin_layout Standard
29890 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29891 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
29892 definitions for each branch.
29893 For example you can define for the question branch
29897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29898 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29899 -syntax, see section
29900 \begin_inset space ~
29904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29906 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29918 \begin_layout Standard
29928 \begin_layout Standard
29938 \begin_layout Standard
29939 and for the answer branch
29942 \begin_layout Standard
29952 \begin_layout Standard
29962 \begin_layout Standard
29963 \begin_inset Branch Question
29966 \begin_layout Standard
29970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29998 \begin_layout Standard
29999 \begin_inset Branch Answer
30002 \begin_layout Standard
30006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30034 \begin_layout Standard
30035 Now it is possible to use the
30039 question{\SpecialChar ldots
30046 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
30049 commands to obtain conditional output.
30050 Here is an example formula where only the
30057 \begin_inset Formula
30059 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
30067 \begin_layout Standard
30068 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
30076 \begin_layout Standard
30077 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
30079 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30083 \begin_inset space \space{}
30086 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
30088 For this advanced usage, see the
30094 Flex insets and InsetLayout
30099 \begin_layout Section
30101 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30103 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
30108 \begin_inset Index idx
30111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30120 \begin_layout Standard
30123 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30124 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30127 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
30129 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30135 \begin_inset Index idx
30138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30140 -packages ! hyperref
30145 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
30146 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
30147 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
30148 part of the document.
30152 \begin_layout Standard
30153 The header information in the dialog tab
30157 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
30158 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
30159 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
30160 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
30164 \begin_inset space ~
30168 \begin_inset space ~
30173 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
30174 tries to extract the header information from your document title
30175 and author entries.
30179 \begin_inset space ~
30183 \begin_inset space ~
30187 \begin_inset space ~
30192 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30195 \begin_layout Standard
30196 You can specify in the dialog tab
30200 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30205 \begin_inset space ~
30209 \begin_inset space ~
30213 \begin_inset space ~
30218 option allows long links to be split;
30221 \begin_inset space ~
30225 \begin_inset space ~
30229 \begin_inset space ~
30237 \begin_inset space ~
30242 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30245 \begin_inset space ~
30250 colors the different links.
30251 The default colors are:
30254 \begin_layout Labeling
30255 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30260 for hyperlinks and URLs
30263 \begin_layout Labeling
30264 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30272 \begin_layout Labeling
30273 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30281 \begin_layout Standard
30282 but you can change these in the field
30287 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30290 \begin_layout Standard
30293 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30296 \begin_layout Standard
30301 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30302 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30303 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30306 \begin_layout Standard
30311 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30312 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30313 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30323 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30324 when opening the PDF.
30326 \begin_inset space ~
30329 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30330 \begin_inset space ~
30333 1 will only display the sections.
30336 \begin_layout Standard
30337 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30338 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30344 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30345 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30354 \begin_layout Section
30356 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30358 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30360 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30367 \begin_layout Subsection
30370 \begin_inset Index idx
30373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30381 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30383 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30390 \begin_layout Standard
30391 As \SpecialChar LyX
30392 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30393 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30394 commands and constructs,
30397 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30398 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30399 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30400 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30401 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30402 cannot support all packages and
30406 \begin_layout Standard
30407 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30408 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30409 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30413 Code box is created by the menu
30415 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30417 \begin_inset space ~
30422 or by the toolbar button
30435 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30443 \begin_layout Standard
30444 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30446 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30448 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30449 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30456 , you can write the command part
30462 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30463 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30467 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30468 Code box behind the word.
30469 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30470 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30474 \begin_layout Standard
30475 \begin_inset Graphics
30476 filename clipart/ERT.png
30484 \begin_layout Standard
30488 \begin_layout Standard
30489 This is a line with a
30493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30516 \begin_layout Standard
30517 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30525 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30526 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30527 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30528 know that the command is finished.
30536 \begin_layout Subsection
30537 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30539 \begin_inset Argument 1
30542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30543 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30550 \begin_inset Index idx
30553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30561 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30563 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30570 \begin_layout Standard
30571 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30572 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30573 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30574 uses in the background.
30575 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30576 is based on commands, you can
30577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30585 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30586 any time if you know the right commands.
30587 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30588 is the end of the day.
30589 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30590 all caption labels bold.
30591 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30593 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30597 \begin_layout Standard
30598 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30600 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30602 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30605 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30614 \begin_layout Standard
30615 As result you find that the package
30620 \begin_inset Index idx
30623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30625 -packages ! caption
30631 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30633 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30636 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30640 \begin_inset space ~
30648 \begin_layout Standard
30653 usepackage[options]{package name}
30656 \begin_layout Standard
30657 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30658 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30659 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30660 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30663 \begin_layout Standard
30664 In your case the package name is
30669 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30674 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30675 So you add the command
30678 \begin_layout Standard
30683 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30686 \begin_layout Standard
30687 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30692 For more commands provided by the
30696 package, have a look at its documentation,
30697 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30711 \begin_layout Standard
30712 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30714 For example if you use a
30718 class, you don't need the package
30722 , you can instead write
30725 \begin_layout Standard
30730 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30735 \begin_layout Standard
30736 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30737 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30738 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30745 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30748 \begin_layout Standard
30749 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30750 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30752 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30753 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30754 Code box as described in the previous
30758 \begin_layout Standard
30759 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30760 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30763 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30765 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30772 \begin_layout Standard
30773 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30779 \begin_layout Standard
30783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30793 \begin_inset Note Note
30796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30797 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30805 \begin_layout Left Header
30806 \begin_inset Argument 1
30809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30829 \begin_inset Note Note
30832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30833 defines the header line as described below
30841 \begin_layout Center Header
30842 \begin_inset Argument 1
30845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30854 \begin_layout Right Header
30855 \begin_inset Argument 1
30858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30879 \begin_layout Left Footer
30880 \begin_inset Argument 1
30883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30904 \begin_layout Center Footer
30905 \begin_inset Argument 1
30908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30920 \begin_inset Newline newline
30924 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30930 \begin_layout Right Footer
30931 \begin_inset Argument 1
30934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30956 \begin_layout Section
30957 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30958 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30960 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30965 \begin_inset Index idx
30968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30969 Document ! Header/Footer line
30975 \begin_inset Index idx
30978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30987 \begin_layout Standard
30988 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30992 \begin_inset space ~
31003 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31009 \begin_inset space ~
31015 As a second step add in the menu
31017 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31018 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31027 Custom Header/Footerlines
31030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31034 This module offers the following 6
31035 \begin_inset space ~
31041 \begin_layout Description
31043 \begin_inset space ~
31047 \begin_inset space ~
31051 \begin_inset space ~
31055 \begin_inset space ~
31059 \begin_inset space ~
31065 \begin_layout Description
31067 \begin_inset space ~
31071 \begin_inset space ~
31075 \begin_inset space ~
31079 \begin_inset space ~
31083 \begin_inset space ~
31089 \begin_layout Standard
31090 for the different positions in the header/footer.
31091 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
31094 \begin_layout Standard
31095 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
31096 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
31098 \begin_inset space ~
31102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31104 reference "fig:Page-layout"
31108 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
31111 \begin_layout Standard
31112 \begin_inset Float figure
31118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31121 \begin_inset Tabular
31122 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
31123 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
31124 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31125 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31126 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31128 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
31140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31146 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31157 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31175 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31186 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
31189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31190 The normal text on the page goes here.
31191 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
31193 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
31194 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
31199 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31208 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31219 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31237 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31248 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31266 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31284 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31287 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31289 name "fig:Page-layout"
31293 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31306 \begin_layout Standard
31307 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31315 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31319 \begin_inset space ~
31324 is set to “Default”.
31325 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31334 \begin_layout Subsection
31338 \begin_layout Standard
31339 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
31340 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
31341 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31342 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31344 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
31346 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31349 \begin_layout Standard
31350 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31351 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31355 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31357 \begin_inset space ~
31365 \begin_layout Description
31368 thepage prints the current page number
31371 \begin_layout Description
31374 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31377 \begin_layout Description
31380 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31383 \begin_layout Description
31386 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31387 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31394 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31397 because it usually goes in a left header.
31400 \begin_layout Description
31403 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31404 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31406 It is normally used in the right header.
31409 \begin_layout Subsection
31410 Default header/footer
31413 \begin_layout Standard
31414 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31415 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31416 footer has the page number.
31417 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31418 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31419 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31422 \begin_inset space ~
31430 \begin_layout Subsection
31434 \begin_layout Standard
31435 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31436 Some pages are different.
31437 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
31438 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
31439 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31440 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31441 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31444 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31445 Header and footer decoration line
31448 \begin_layout Standard
31449 By default, you get a 0.4
31450 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31453 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31454 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31466 in the following way:
31469 \begin_layout Standard
31476 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31479 \begin_layout Standard
31480 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31493 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31494 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31500 \begin_layout Standard
31501 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31503 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
31504 \begin_inset space ~
31508 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31517 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31518 Several header/footer lines
31521 \begin_layout Standard
31522 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31523 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
31524 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31526 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31541 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31542 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31544 \begin_inset space ~
31552 \begin_layout Standard
31559 headheight}{height}
31562 \begin_layout Standard
31567 is a size in standard units (e.
31568 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31572 \begin_inset space \space{}
31580 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
31581 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31582 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31583 logfile with the menu
31585 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31587 \begin_inset space ~
31595 \begin_inset space ~
31600 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31605 \begin_inset Index idx
31608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31610 -packages ! fancyhdr
31616 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31617 for your header/footer.
31620 \begin_layout Subsection
31624 \begin_layout Standard
31625 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31626 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31627 This example consists of the following definition:
31630 \begin_layout Description
31632 \begin_inset space ~
31641 , empty optional argument
31644 \begin_layout Description
31646 \begin_inset space ~
31649 Header empty, empty optional argument
31652 \begin_layout Description
31654 \begin_inset space ~
31663 in the optional argument
31666 \begin_layout Description
31668 \begin_inset space ~
31677 in the optional argument
31680 \begin_layout Description
31682 \begin_inset space ~
31695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31699 \begin_inset Newline newline
31703 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31710 in the optional argument
31713 \begin_layout Description
31715 \begin_inset space ~
31724 , empty optional argument
31727 \begin_layout Description
31730 headrulewidth set to 2
31731 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31737 \begin_layout Standard
31738 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31739 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31745 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31754 \begin_layout Standard
31755 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31761 \begin_layout Standard
31765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31769 pagestyle{headings}
31775 \begin_inset Note Note
31778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31779 switches back to page style with the default headings
31787 \begin_layout Section
31788 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31789 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31791 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31796 \begin_inset Index idx
31799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31806 \begin_inset Index idx
31809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31818 \begin_layout Standard
31820 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31821 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31822 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31825 \begin_layout Subsection
31829 \begin_layout Standard
31830 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31836 \begin_inset Index idx
31839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31841 -packages ! preview-latex
31846 (on some systems named simply
31851 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31853 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31859 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31861 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31869 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
31870 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31871 -package are automatically
31872 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
31876 \begin_layout Subsection
31880 \begin_layout Standard
31881 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31882 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31884 activate the option
31887 \begin_inset space ~
31894 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31900 \begin_inset space ~
31904 \begin_inset space ~
31907 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
31914 \begin_inset space ~
31927 \begin_inset space ~
31932 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31935 \begin_layout Standard
31936 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31941 \begin_inset space ~
31949 \begin_inset space ~
31957 \begin_layout Standard
31958 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
31959 and when you finish
31963 \begin_layout Standard
31964 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31972 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31973 generated by activating the option
31976 \begin_inset space ~
31982 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31990 \begin_layout Subsection
31991 Selected document parts
31994 \begin_layout Standard
31995 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31996 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
31997 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
31998 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32000 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
32002 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32006 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
32007 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
32008 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
32011 \begin_layout Standard
32012 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32019 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32031 is explained in section
32033 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
32038 \begin_inset space ~
32048 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
32049 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
32050 the final rotated boxes,
32051 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
32052 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
32054 Here is the result:
32057 \begin_layout Standard
32058 \begin_inset Preview
32060 \begin_layout Standard
32065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32069 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
32075 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
32085 height_special "totalheight"
32090 backgroundcolor "none"
32093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32118 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
32124 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
32131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32146 \begin_layout Standard
32147 Previewing works also for colors.
32148 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32167 is explained in section
32174 \begin_inset space ~
32187 \begin_layout Standard
32188 \begin_inset Preview
32190 \begin_layout Standard
32194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32213 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
32218 This is text within a colored, framed box.
32222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32237 \begin_layout Standard
32238 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32244 \begin_layout Standard
32245 If \SpecialChar LyX
32246 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32247 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
32248 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
32249 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32250 packages in your document preamble that are required by
32251 the \SpecialChar TeX
32253 If \SpecialChar LyX
32254 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
32255 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
32257 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32258 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32259 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32262 \begin_layout Subsection
32267 \begin_layout Standard
32268 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32269 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32272 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32274 \begin_inset space ~
32279 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32281 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32283 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32284 's main window, then only this selection
32285 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32286 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32287 the source view window.
32292 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32293 ; but note that if you have
32294 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32296 not just the one which is open at the time.
32299 \begin_layout Section
32300 Advanced Find and Replace
32301 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32303 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32308 \begin_inset Index idx
32311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32318 \begin_inset Index idx
32321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32330 \begin_layout Subsection
32334 \begin_layout Standard
32335 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32336 allows for searching of complex,
32337 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32339 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32340 The key-features are:
32343 \begin_layout Itemize
32344 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32345 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32346 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32350 \begin_layout Itemize
32351 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32352 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32353 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32354 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32357 \begin_layout Itemize
32358 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32359 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32360 outside of mathematics environments
32363 \begin_layout Itemize
32364 Search may be widened to a specific
32369 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32373 \begin_inset space ~
32376 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32377 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32384 \begin_layout Itemize
32385 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32386 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32387 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32391 \begin_inset space ~
32394 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32397 \begin_layout Subsection
32401 \begin_layout Standard
32402 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32404 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32417 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32420 ) or the toolbar button
32423 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32429 Advanced Find and Replace
32434 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32438 \begin_layout Standard
32444 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32448 \begin_inset space ~
32453 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32456 arg "paragraph-break"
32460 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32461 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32465 arg "paragraph-break"
32468 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32472 searches backwards.
32475 \begin_layout Standard
32479 \begin_inset space ~
32484 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32493 \begin_inset space ~
32498 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32501 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32502 Searching for mathematics
32505 \begin_layout Standard
32506 Mathematical formulas, such as
32507 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32510 or something more complex like
32511 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32514 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32519 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32520 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32521 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32522 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
32528 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32532 \begin_layout Standard
32533 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32534 This is done by switching to the
32538 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32543 This way, entering in the
32550 \begin_layout Itemize
32551 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32552 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32555 \begin_layout Itemize
32556 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32557 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32560 \begin_layout Itemize
32561 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32562 of it only within section headings.
32563 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32564 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32568 \begin_layout Itemize
32569 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32570 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32573 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32577 \begin_layout Standard
32578 The entries made in the
32582 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32585 \begin_inset space ~
32591 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32595 button or alternatively press
32598 arg "paragraph-break"
32605 while the cursor is in the
32608 \begin_inset space ~
32616 \begin_layout Standard
32617 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32619 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32623 \begin_layout Itemize
32624 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32625 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32633 with its typewriter version
32634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32648 \begin_layout Itemize
32649 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32655 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32667 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32674 (you may want to enable the
32677 \begin_inset space ~
32685 \begin_inset space ~
32690 options and disable the
32698 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32706 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32707 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32711 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32714 , or occurrences of
32715 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32719 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32725 \begin_layout Subsection
32729 \begin_layout Standard
32730 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32735 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32737 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32739 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32748 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32754 This is done with the context menu
32756 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32757 Insert Regular Expression
32759 while the cursor is in the
32764 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32765 expression matching rules
32769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32770 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32773 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32777 \begin_inset space ~
32780 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32781 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32787 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32788 same text in the document.
32789 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32790 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32793 \begin_layout Enumerate
32794 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32799 editor the fraction
32800 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32804 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32807 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32808 fractions with the given denominator.
32811 \begin_layout Enumerate
32812 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32824 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32829 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32830 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32831 Also, by inserting a
32832 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32835 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32836 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32839 \begin_layout Standard
32840 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32841 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32842 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32845 , and referring back to them through
32846 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32850 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32854 For example, try searching with the regexp
32855 \begin_inset Newline newline
32858 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32861 \begin_inset Newline newline
32864 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32867 \begin_layout Standard
32868 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32871 \begin_layout Standard
32872 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32880 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32881 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32882 sub-expressions is absolute.
32884 \begin_inset space ~
32888 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32891 always refers to the first occurrence of
32892 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32895 in all entered regexps.
32903 \begin_layout Section
32905 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32907 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32912 \begin_inset Index idx
32915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32924 \begin_layout Standard
32926 has a built-in spell checker.
32929 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32936 key or the toolbar button
32939 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32942 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32943 beginning of the currently selected text.
32944 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32945 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32946 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32947 scrolled so that it is visible.
32948 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32949 n, if any could be found.
32950 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32954 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32955 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32958 \begin_layout Standard
32959 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32962 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32966 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32967 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32969 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32970 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32973 \begin_inset space ~
32981 arg "dialog-show character"
32984 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32986 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32989 \begin_layout Standard
32990 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32991 can be downloaded from here:
32992 \begin_inset Newline newline
32996 \begin_inset Flex URL
32999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33001 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
33007 \begin_inset Newline newline
33011 \begin_inset space ~
33014 files for each language.
33015 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
33016 \begin_inset space ~
33019 files into \SpecialChar LyX
33020 's installation subfolder
33028 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33030 \begin_inset Newline newline
33033 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
33034 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
33035 but in most cases these are
33051 is the language code.
33054 \begin_layout Subsection
33058 \begin_layout Standard
33061 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33062 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33064 \begin_inset space ~
33067 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33070 you can set the following things:
33073 \begin_layout Description
33075 \begin_inset space ~
33078 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
33079 should use for spell checking.
33080 Depending on your platform,
33094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33095 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
33096 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
33111 \begin_inset space ~
33114 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
33117 \begin_layout Description
33119 \begin_inset space ~
33122 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
33123 will always use the given language
33124 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
33127 \begin_layout Description
33129 \begin_inset space ~
33132 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
33134 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33138 \begin_inset space \space{}
33142 This should normally not be needed.
33145 \begin_layout Description
33147 \begin_inset space ~
33151 \begin_inset space ~
33154 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
33156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33166 \begin_layout Description
33168 \begin_inset space ~
33171 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
33172 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
33173 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
33174 appear in a context menu.
33175 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
33179 \begin_layout Description
33181 \begin_inset space ~
33185 \begin_inset space ~
33189 \begin_inset space ~
33192 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
33196 \begin_layout Section
33198 \begin_inset Index idx
33201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33208 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33210 name "sec:Thesaurus"
33217 \begin_layout Standard
33219 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
33220 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
33229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33230 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33232 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
33241 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
33243 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
33244 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
33245 which are available for many languages.
33248 \begin_layout Standard
33249 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
33250 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
33254 \begin_layout Subsection
33255 Setting up the thesaurus
33258 \begin_layout Standard
33267 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33271 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33276 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33278 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33282 \begin_inset space ~
33290 For instance, the US English files are named:
33293 \begin_layout Itemize
33297 \begin_layout Itemize
33301 \begin_layout Standard
33310 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33311 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33314 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33315 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33316 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33318 \begin_inset space ~
33323 ) to the path where they are installed.
33327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33328 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33329 ies, typical locations are
33335 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33339 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33343 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33346 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33352 LibreOffice-<Version>
33359 On the Mac, the default location is
33361 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33362 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33363 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33364 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33365 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33366 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33374 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33375 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33376 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33380 \begin_layout Standard
33381 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33382 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33386 \begin_layout Itemize
33387 \begin_inset Flex URL
33390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33392 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33400 \begin_layout Standard
33401 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33402 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33404 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33405 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33406 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33408 \begin_inset space ~
33413 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33415 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33416 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33420 \begin_layout Standard
33421 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33423 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33426 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33432 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33435 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33436 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33438 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33444 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33445 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33446 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33448 \begin_inset space ~
33453 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33456 \begin_layout Subsection
33457 Using the thesaurus
33460 \begin_layout Standard
33461 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33463 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33466 or the toolbar button
33469 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33472 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33474 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33476 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33477 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33478 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33487 ), related terms (such as
33490 \begin_inset space ~
33499 ), compounds (such as
33502 \begin_inset space ~
33511 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33520 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33523 \begin_layout Standard
33524 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33525 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33529 \begin_layout Standard
33530 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33531 the dictionary, such as the above
33535 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33536 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33540 \begin_inset space \space{}
33543 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33544 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33545 For example, looking up the word form
33549 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33554 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33555 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33559 \begin_inset space \space{}
33570 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33571 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33572 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33575 \begin_layout Section
33577 \begin_inset Index idx
33580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33587 \begin_inset Index idx
33590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33591 Document ! Change Tracking
33597 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33599 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33606 \begin_layout Standard
33607 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33608 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33609 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33610 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33612 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33614 \begin_inset space ~
33617 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33619 \begin_inset space ~
33627 \begin_layout Standard
33628 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33642 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33643 You can change the color in
33645 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33646 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33648 \begin_inset space ~
33652 \begin_inset space ~
33657 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33663 \begin_inset Index idx
33666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33667 Color ! Change tracking
33672 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33673 's status bar when the
33674 cursor is in changed text.
33675 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33678 arg "changes-merge"
33684 \begin_layout Standard
33685 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33687 \begin_inset Index idx
33690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33699 \begin_layout Standard
33700 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33706 \begin_layout Standard
33707 \begin_inset Graphics
33708 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33716 \begin_layout Standard
33717 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33723 \begin_layout Standard
33724 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33727 \begin_layout Standard
33728 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33734 \begin_layout Standard
33735 \begin_inset Tabular
33736 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33737 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33738 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33739 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33740 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33749 arg "changes-track"
33757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33763 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33765 \begin_inset space ~
33768 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33770 \begin_inset space ~
33779 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33788 arg "changes-output"
33796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33802 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33804 \begin_inset space ~
33807 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33809 \begin_inset space ~
33813 \begin_inset space ~
33817 \begin_inset space ~
33826 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33847 Jumps to the next change
33853 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33862 arg "change-accept"
33870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33876 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33878 \begin_inset space ~
33881 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33883 \begin_inset space ~
33892 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33901 arg "change-reject"
33909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33915 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33917 \begin_inset space ~
33920 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33922 \begin_inset space ~
33931 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33940 arg "changes-merge"
33948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33954 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33956 \begin_inset space ~
33959 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33961 \begin_inset space ~
33970 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33979 arg "all-changes-accept"
33987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33993 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33995 \begin_inset space ~
33998 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34000 \begin_inset space ~
34004 \begin_inset space ~
34013 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34022 arg "all-changes-reject"
34030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34036 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34038 \begin_inset space ~
34041 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34043 \begin_inset space ~
34047 \begin_inset space ~
34056 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34079 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34080 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
34082 \begin_inset space ~
34091 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34114 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
34116 \begin_inset space ~
34132 \begin_layout Standard
34133 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34139 \begin_layout Standard
34140 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
34160 \begin_layout Standard
34161 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
34162 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
34163 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
34164 the next change after the current cursor position.
34165 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
34166 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
34167 step to the next change.
34168 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
34171 \begin_layout Standard
34172 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
34173 to describe a change.
34176 \begin_layout Standard
34177 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34183 \begin_inset Index idx
34186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34188 -packages ! dvipost
34194 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34196 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34202 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34206 \begin_layout Section
34207 Comparison of Documents
34208 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34210 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
34215 \begin_inset Index idx
34218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34219 Comparison of documents
34227 \begin_layout Standard
34228 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
34231 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34235 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
34236 file with change tracking enabled showing the
34238 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
34240 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
34244 \begin_inset space ~
34248 \begin_inset space ~
34252 \begin_inset space ~
34261 \begin_inset space ~
34265 \begin_inset space ~
34269 \begin_inset space ~
34273 \begin_inset space ~
34277 \begin_inset space ~
34281 \begin_inset space ~
34286 enables the change tracking option
34289 \begin_inset space ~
34293 \begin_inset space ~
34297 \begin_inset space ~
34302 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34305 \begin_layout Section
34306 International Support
34307 \begin_inset Index idx
34310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34311 International support
34319 \begin_layout Standard
34320 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34321 with any language you want.
34322 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34323 up \SpecialChar LyX
34325 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34327 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34334 \begin_layout Standard
34335 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34336 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34337 \begin_inset space ~
34341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34343 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34350 \begin_layout Subsection
34352 \begin_inset Index idx
34355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34362 \begin_inset Index idx
34365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34366 Document ! Settings
34372 \begin_inset Index idx
34375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34376 Document ! Language
34384 \begin_layout Standard
34387 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34388 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34391 dialog lets you set
34393 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34398 \begin_layout Standard
34403 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34408 \begin_inset space ~
34413 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34414 For details about the different encoding options see section
34415 \begin_inset space ~
34419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34421 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34428 \begin_layout Subsection
34429 Keyboard mapping configuration
34430 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34432 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34439 \begin_layout Standard
34440 If you have for example a U.
34441 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34444 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34445 can use an alternate keymap.
34446 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34451 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34452 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34453 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34456 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34457 \begin_inset space ~
34461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34463 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34468 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34469 which one you want to use.
34472 \begin_layout Standard
34473 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34474 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34475 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34476 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34479 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34480 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34481 one to support the characters you want.
34482 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34489 \begin_layout Chapter
34492 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34494 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34501 \begin_layout Standard
34502 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34503 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34504 topic inside the user's guide.
34507 \begin_layout Section
34509 \begin_inset Index idx
34512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34521 \begin_layout Standard
34526 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34529 \begin_layout Subsection
34533 \begin_layout Standard
34534 Creates a new document.
34537 \begin_layout Subsection
34541 \begin_layout Standard
34542 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34543 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34544 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34547 \begin_layout Subsection
34551 \begin_layout Standard
34555 \begin_layout Subsection
34559 \begin_layout Standard
34560 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34561 Click there on a file to open it.
34564 \begin_layout Subsection
34568 \begin_layout Standard
34569 Closes the current document.
34572 \begin_layout Subsection
34576 \begin_layout Standard
34577 Closes all opened documents.
34580 \begin_layout Subsection
34584 \begin_layout Standard
34585 Saves the actual document.
34588 \begin_layout Subsection
34592 \begin_layout Standard
34593 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34596 \begin_layout Subsection
34600 \begin_layout Standard
34601 Saves all opened documents.
34604 \begin_layout Subsection
34608 \begin_layout Standard
34609 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34612 \begin_layout Subsection
34616 \begin_layout Standard
34617 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34618 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34619 It is described in the section
34621 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34626 Additional Features
34631 \begin_layout Subsection
34635 \begin_layout Standard
34636 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34637 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34639 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34640 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34644 \begin_layout Standard
34645 When using the menu entry
34648 \begin_inset space ~
34653 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34657 \begin_inset space ~
34661 \begin_inset space ~
34665 \begin_inset space ~
34670 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34671 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34674 \begin_layout Subsection
34676 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34678 name "subsec:Export"
34685 \begin_layout Standard
34686 You can export your document to various file formats.
34687 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34689 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34690 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34691 during its configuration.
34694 \begin_layout Standard
34695 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34697 \begin_inset space ~
34701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34703 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34710 \begin_layout Description
34716 \begin_inset space ~
34719 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34721 \begin_inset space ~
34724 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34725 \begin_inset Newline newline
34728 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34729 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34733 \begin_layout Description
34734 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34740 \begin_layout Description
34742 \begin_inset space ~
34745 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34751 \begin_layout Description
34752 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34753 's native DVI-format.
34754 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34755 files paths or file names in your document.
34757 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34764 \begin_layout Description
34765 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34766 in files paths or file names
34769 \begin_layout Description
34771 \begin_inset space ~
34778 ) DVI-format using the program
34780 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34783 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34787 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34795 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34803 \begin_layout Description
34805 \begin_inset space ~
34808 (cropped) the same as
34812 but with cropped page margins.
34815 \begin_layout Description
34817 \begin_inset space ~
34820 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34824 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34829 \begin_layout Description
34833 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34841 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34849 \begin_layout Description
34851 \begin_inset space ~
34855 \begin_inset space ~
34858 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34862 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34870 \begin_layout Description
34874 \begin_inset space ~
34883 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34884 source that is compilable with the program
34886 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34890 \begin_layout Description
34894 \begin_inset space ~
34899 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34900 source, additionally all images used in the document
34901 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34905 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34908 \begin_layout Description
34912 \begin_inset space ~
34917 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34918 source code, additionally all images used in the document
34919 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
34927 \begin_layout Description
34931 \begin_inset space ~
34940 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34941 source that is compilable with the program
34947 \begin_layout Description
34949 \begin_inset space ~
34953 \begin_inset space ~
34960 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34961 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
34967 \begin_layout Description
34969 \begin_inset space ~
34972 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
34973 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
34975 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34979 \begin_inset space \space{}
34984 \begin_inset space ~
34988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35003 represent the version number)
35006 \begin_layout Description
35008 \begin_inset space ~
35012 \begin_inset space ~
35015 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
35016 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
35017 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35021 \begin_layout Description
35022 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
35023 's internal XHTML engine
35026 \begin_layout Description
35028 \begin_inset space ~
35032 \begin_inset space ~
35036 \begin_inset space ~
35040 \begin_inset space ~
35043 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
35048 For the conversion the program
35057 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35060 \begin_layout Description
35061 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
35066 \begin_layout Description
35068 \begin_inset space ~
35071 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
35073 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
35076 For the conversion the program
35085 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35088 \begin_layout Description
35090 \begin_inset space ~
35093 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
35094 For the conversion the program
35103 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35106 \begin_layout Description
35108 \begin_inset space ~
35111 (cropped) the same as
35114 \begin_inset space ~
35119 but with cropped page margins
35122 \begin_layout Description
35126 \begin_inset space ~
35131 PDF-format using the program
35135 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35138 \begin_layout Description
35142 \begin_inset space ~
35146 \begin_inset space ~
35154 \begin_inset space ~
35159 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
35160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35164 \begin_inset space \space{}
35167 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
35171 \begin_layout Description
35175 \begin_inset space ~
35180 PDF-format using the program
35182 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35185 , produces PDF-files directly
35188 \begin_layout Description
35192 \begin_inset space ~
35197 PDF-format using the program
35201 , produces PDF-files directly
35204 \begin_layout Description
35208 \begin_inset space ~
35213 PDF-format using the program
35217 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35220 \begin_layout Description
35224 \begin_inset space ~
35229 PDF-format using the program
35234 , produces PDF-files directly
35237 \begin_layout Description
35241 \begin_inset space ~
35249 \begin_layout Description
35253 \begin_inset space ~
35257 \begin_inset space ~
35262 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35263 and then exported as text using the program
35268 \begin_layout Description
35273 PostScript format using the program
35281 options see section
35282 \begin_inset space ~
35286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35288 reference "subsec:General-output"
35295 \begin_layout Description
35296 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35297 source and also code in the statistical programming
35311 it is possible to use
35315 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35319 \begin_layout Standard
35320 If one of the menu entries
35327 \begin_inset space ~
35336 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35338 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
35340 \begin_inset space ~
35344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35346 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35351 \begin_inset Index idx
35354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35355 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35364 \begin_layout Subsection
35368 \begin_layout Standard
35369 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35370 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35373 \begin_inset space ~
35377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35379 reference "sec:Paths"
35384 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35393 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35394 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35395 's preferences as described in section
35396 \begin_inset space ~
35400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35402 reference "subsec:Converters"
35409 \begin_layout Subsection
35410 New and Close Window
35413 \begin_layout Standard
35414 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35418 \begin_layout Subsection
35422 \begin_layout Standard
35423 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35426 \begin_layout Section
35428 \begin_inset Index idx
35431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35440 \begin_layout Subsection
35444 \begin_layout Standard
35445 Described in section
35446 \begin_inset space ~
35450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35452 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35459 \begin_layout Subsection
35460 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35463 \begin_layout Standard
35464 Described in section
35465 \begin_inset space ~
35469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35471 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35478 \begin_layout Subsection
35482 \begin_layout Standard
35483 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35484 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35487 \begin_layout Subsection
35491 \begin_layout Standard
35492 Selects the whole document.
35495 \begin_layout Subsection
35496 Find & Replace (Quick)
35499 \begin_layout Standard
35500 Described in section
35501 \begin_inset space ~
35505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35507 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35514 \begin_layout Subsection
35515 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35518 \begin_layout Standard
35519 Described in section
35520 \begin_inset space ~
35524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35526 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35533 \begin_layout Subsection
35534 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35537 \begin_layout Standard
35538 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35542 \begin_layout Subsection
35546 \begin_layout Standard
35547 Described in section
35548 \begin_inset space ~
35552 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35554 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35561 \begin_layout Subsection
35563 \begin_inset Index idx
35566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35567 Paragraph ! Settings
35575 \begin_layout Standard
35576 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35577 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35581 \begin_layout Standard
35582 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35583 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35589 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35590 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35592 \begin_inset space ~
35600 \begin_layout Subsection
35601 Table and Rows & Columns
35604 \begin_layout Standard
35605 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
35606 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35607 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
35610 \begin_layout Subsection
35614 \begin_layout Standard
35615 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
35616 It will dissolve this inset.
35617 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
35621 \begin_layout Subsection
35625 \begin_layout Standard
35626 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
35627 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
35630 \begin_layout Subsection
35631 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35634 \begin_layout Standard
35635 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35637 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35638 \begin_inset space ~
35642 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35644 reference "sec:Nesting"
35649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35651 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35658 \begin_layout Subsection
35661 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35664 \begin_layout Standard
35665 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35666 nts of the same type.
35668 \begin_inset space ~
35672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35674 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35678 for an explanation.
35681 \begin_layout Section
35683 \begin_inset Index idx
35686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35695 \begin_layout Standard
35696 At the bottom of the
35700 menu the opened documents are listed.
35703 \begin_layout Subsection
35704 Open/Close all Insets
35707 \begin_layout Standard
35708 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35711 \begin_layout Subsection
35712 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35715 \begin_layout Standard
35716 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35719 \begin_layout Standard
35720 Math macros are described in the
35727 \begin_layout Subsection
35731 \begin_layout Standard
35732 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35733 \begin_inset space ~
35737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35739 reference "sec:Navigating"
35744 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35746 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
35753 \begin_layout Subsection
35757 \begin_layout Standard
35758 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35760 \begin_inset space ~
35764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35766 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35773 \begin_layout Subsection
35777 \begin_layout Standard
35778 Opens a window showing console messages.
35779 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
35781 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35784 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35785 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
35786 is processing the document.
35789 \begin_layout Subsection
35791 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35793 name "subsec:Toolbars"
35798 \begin_inset Index idx
35801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35810 \begin_layout Standard
35811 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35812 All toolbars and the
35815 \begin_inset space ~
35820 can be turned on and off.
35825 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35837 \begin_inset space ~
35849 \begin_inset space ~
35854 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35858 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35865 \begin_layout Standard
35870 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35874 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35875 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35876 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35877 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35878 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35881 \begin_layout Standard
35883 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35884 \begin_inset space ~
35888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35890 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35897 \begin_layout Subsection
35901 \begin_layout Standard
35905 \begin_inset space ~
35909 \begin_inset space ~
35913 \begin_inset space ~
35917 \begin_inset space ~
35921 \begin_inset space ~
35925 \begin_inset space ~
35930 will split \SpecialChar LyX
35931 's main window vertically while
35934 \begin_inset space ~
35938 \begin_inset space ~
35942 \begin_inset space ~
35946 \begin_inset space ~
35950 \begin_inset space ~
35954 \begin_inset space ~
35959 will split it horizontally.
35960 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35961 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35962 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35963 three or more documents at the same time.
35964 To close a split view, use the menu
35967 \begin_inset space ~
35971 \begin_inset space ~
35979 \begin_layout Subsection
35983 \begin_layout Standard
35984 Closes a split view.
35987 \begin_layout Subsection
35991 \begin_layout Standard
35992 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35993 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35994 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
35995 's main window fullscreen.
35996 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35997 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
36000 \begin_layout Section
36002 \begin_inset Index idx
36005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36014 \begin_layout Subsection
36018 \begin_layout Standard
36019 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
36020 \begin_inset space ~
36024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36026 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
36037 \begin_layout Subsection
36039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36041 name "subsec:Special-Character"
36048 \begin_layout Standard
36049 Here you can insert the following characters:
36052 \begin_layout Description
36057 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
36060 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
36061 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36062 -packages you have installed.
36063 You can get a complete display by checking
36066 \begin_inset space ~
36072 \begin_inset Newline newline
36076 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36084 Not all characters will be visible in the
36088 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
36089 dialog (see section
36090 \begin_inset space ~
36094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36096 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
36100 ) can display every character.
36108 \begin_layout Description
36109 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
36113 \begin_layout Description
36115 \begin_inset space ~
36119 \begin_inset space ~
36122 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
36123 \begin_inset space ~
36127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36129 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
36136 \begin_layout Description
36138 \begin_inset space ~
36141 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
36144 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36145 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36151 \begin_layout Description
36153 \begin_inset space ~
36156 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
36159 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36160 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36166 \begin_layout Description
36168 \begin_inset space ~
36171 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
36175 \begin_layout Description
36177 \begin_inset space ~
36180 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
36184 \begin_layout Description
36186 \begin_inset space ~
36189 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
36195 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36201 \begin_layout Description
36203 \begin_inset space ~
36206 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
36210 \begin_layout Description
36212 \begin_inset space ~
36216 \begin_inset Index idx
36219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36226 \begin_inset Index idx
36229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36230 Language ! Phonetic symbols
36235 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36236 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36238 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36244 \begin_inset Index idx
36247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36255 \begin_inset Newline newline
36258 More information about this feature can be found in the
36264 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36270 \begin_layout Description
36271 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
36273 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
36274 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
36278 \begin_layout Subsection
36282 \begin_layout Standard
36283 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36286 \begin_layout Description
36287 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36288 \begin_inset script superscript
36290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36299 \begin_layout Description
36300 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36301 \begin_inset script subscript
36303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36312 \begin_layout Description
36314 \begin_inset space ~
36317 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36318 \begin_inset space ~
36322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36324 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
36331 \begin_layout Description
36333 \begin_inset space ~
36336 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36337 \begin_inset space ~
36341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36343 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36350 \begin_layout Description
36352 \begin_inset space ~
36355 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36356 \begin_inset space ~
36360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36362 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36369 \begin_layout Description
36371 \begin_inset space ~
36374 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36376 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36380 \begin_inset space \space{}
36383 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36384 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36393 To insert a fraction use the command
36398 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36402 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36411 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36418 \begin_layout Description
36420 \begin_inset space ~
36423 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36424 \begin_inset space ~
36428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36430 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36437 \begin_layout Description
36439 \begin_inset space ~
36442 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36443 \begin_inset space ~
36447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36449 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36456 \begin_layout Description
36458 \begin_inset space ~
36461 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36462 \begin_inset space ~
36466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36468 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36475 \begin_layout Description
36476 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36477 \begin_inset space ~
36481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36483 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36490 \begin_layout Description
36492 \begin_inset space ~
36495 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36496 \begin_inset space ~
36500 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36502 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36509 \begin_layout Description
36511 \begin_inset space ~
36514 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36515 \begin_inset space ~
36519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36521 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36528 \begin_layout Description
36530 \begin_inset space ~
36534 \begin_inset space ~
36537 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36538 \begin_inset space ~
36542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36544 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36551 \begin_layout Description
36553 \begin_inset space ~
36556 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36557 as described in section
36558 \begin_inset space ~
36562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36564 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36571 \begin_layout Description
36573 \begin_inset space ~
36576 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36577 \begin_inset space ~
36581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36583 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36590 \begin_layout Description
36592 \begin_inset space ~
36595 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36596 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36598 \begin_inset space ~
36602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36604 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36611 \begin_layout Description
36613 \begin_inset space ~
36616 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36617 \begin_inset space ~
36621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36623 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36630 \begin_layout Description
36632 \begin_inset space ~
36636 \begin_inset space ~
36639 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36640 \begin_inset space ~
36644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36646 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36653 \begin_layout Subsection
36657 \begin_layout Standard
36658 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36662 \begin_inset space ~
36683 are described in section
36684 \begin_inset space ~
36688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36690 reference "sec:toc"
36699 is described in section
36700 \begin_inset space ~
36704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36706 reference "sec:Index"
36714 is described in section
36715 \begin_inset space ~
36719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36721 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36727 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36730 is described in section
36731 \begin_inset space ~
36735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36737 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36744 \begin_layout Subsection
36748 \begin_layout Standard
36749 To insert floats, as described in section
36750 \begin_inset space ~
36754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36756 reference "sec:Floats"
36760 and in detail the chapter
36767 \begin_inset space ~
36775 \begin_layout Subsection
36779 \begin_layout Standard
36780 To insert notes, described in section
36781 \begin_inset space ~
36785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36787 reference "sec:Notes"
36794 \begin_layout Subsection
36798 \begin_layout Standard
36799 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36801 Branches are described in section
36802 \begin_inset space ~
36806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36808 reference "sec:Branches"
36815 \begin_layout Subsection
36819 \begin_layout Standard
36820 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36821 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36823 An example is the document class
36824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36831 with three custom insets.
36834 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36838 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36844 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36847 \begin_layout Subsection
36849 \begin_inset Index idx
36852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36861 \begin_layout Standard
36862 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36864 For more information see chapter
36866 External Document Parts
36869 \begin_inset space ~
36875 \begin_layout Subsection
36877 \begin_inset Index idx
36880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36889 \begin_layout Standard
36890 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36891 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36898 \begin_inset space ~
36906 \begin_layout Subsection
36910 \begin_layout Standard
36915 dialog as described in section
36916 \begin_inset space ~
36920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36922 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36929 \begin_layout Subsection
36933 \begin_layout Standard
36938 as described in section
36939 \begin_inset space ~
36943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36945 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36952 \begin_layout Subsection
36956 \begin_layout Standard
36961 as described in section
36962 \begin_inset space ~
36966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36968 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36975 \begin_layout Subsection
36977 \begin_inset Index idx
36980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36987 \begin_inset Index idx
36990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36991 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
36999 \begin_layout Standard
37000 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
37001 Floats are described in section
37002 \begin_inset space ~
37006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37008 reference "sec:Floats"
37012 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
37014 Multi-page Captions
37019 \begin_inset space ~
37027 \begin_layout Subsection
37031 \begin_layout Standard
37032 Inserts an index entry as described in section
37033 \begin_inset space ~
37037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37039 reference "sec:Index"
37046 \begin_layout Subsection
37050 \begin_layout Standard
37051 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
37052 \begin_inset space ~
37056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37058 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
37065 \begin_layout Subsection
37069 \begin_layout Standard
37070 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
37071 Tables are described in section
37072 \begin_inset space ~
37076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37078 reference "sec:Tables"
37082 and in detail in the chapter
37089 \begin_inset space ~
37097 \begin_layout Subsection
37101 \begin_layout Standard
37107 Graphics are described in section
37108 \begin_inset space ~
37112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37114 reference "sec:Graphics"
37121 \begin_layout Subsection
37125 \begin_layout Standard
37126 Inserts a URL as described in section
37127 \begin_inset space ~
37131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37133 reference "subsec:URLs"
37140 \begin_layout Subsection
37144 \begin_layout Standard
37145 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
37146 \begin_inset space ~
37150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37152 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
37159 \begin_layout Subsection
37163 \begin_layout Standard
37164 Inserts a footnote as described in section
37165 \begin_inset space ~
37169 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37171 reference "sec:Footnotes"
37178 \begin_layout Subsection
37182 \begin_layout Standard
37183 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
37184 \begin_inset space ~
37188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37190 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
37197 \begin_layout Subsection
37201 \begin_layout Standard
37202 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
37203 title or caption of a float.
37204 Inserts a short title as described in section
37205 \begin_inset space ~
37209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37211 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
37218 \begin_layout Subsection
37223 \begin_layout Standard
37224 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
37225 Code box as described in section
37226 \begin_inset space ~
37230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37232 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37239 \begin_layout Subsection
37241 \begin_inset Index idx
37244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37253 \begin_layout Standard
37254 Inserts a program listings box.
37255 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37257 Program Code Listings
37262 \begin_inset space ~
37270 \begin_layout Subsection
37274 \begin_layout Standard
37275 Inserts the actual date.
37276 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37280 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37288 \begin_inset space ~
37296 \begin_layout Subsection
37300 \begin_layout Standard
37301 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37302 \begin_inset space ~
37306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37308 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37315 \begin_layout Section
37317 \begin_inset Index idx
37320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37329 \begin_layout Standard
37330 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37331 \begin_inset space ~
37334 of the current document.
37335 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37338 \begin_layout Subsection
37342 \begin_layout Standard
37343 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37344 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37345 to jump, for example, between section
37346 \begin_inset space ~
37350 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37351 \begin_inset space ~
37354 2.5 and use the submenu
37357 \begin_inset space ~
37361 \begin_inset space ~
37368 \begin_inset space ~
37374 \begin_inset space ~
37378 \begin_inset space ~
37384 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37388 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37394 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37397 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37400 \begin_layout Standard
37401 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37405 \begin_inset space ~
37410 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37413 \begin_inset space ~
37418 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37421 \begin_layout Subsection
37422 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37425 \begin_layout Standard
37426 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37430 \begin_layout Subsection
37434 \begin_layout Standard
37435 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37436 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37437 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37441 \begin_inset space ~
37445 \begin_inset space ~
37453 \begin_layout Subsection
37457 \begin_layout Standard
37458 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37461 The \SpecialChar LyX
37462 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37464 \begin_inset space ~
37472 \begin_inset space ~
37477 manual for a detailed description.
37480 \begin_layout Section
37482 \begin_inset Index idx
37485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37494 \begin_layout Subsection
37498 \begin_layout Standard
37499 Change Tracking is described in section
37500 \begin_inset space ~
37504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37506 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37513 \begin_layout Subsection
37521 \begin_layout Standard
37522 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37523 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37524 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37526 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37527 to the clipboard or update the view.
37528 \begin_inset Newline newline
37531 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37535 \begin_layout Standard
37538 Open Containing Directory
37540 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
37541 's temporary folder for the document.
37542 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
37543 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
37544 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
37545 For example some journals require to send the
37549 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37553 \begin_layout Subsection
37554 Start Appendix Here
37557 \begin_layout Standard
37558 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37559 as described in section
37560 \begin_inset space ~
37564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37566 reference "sec:Appendices"
37573 \begin_layout Subsection
37575 \begin_inset space ~
37581 \begin_layout Standard
37582 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37583 default output format for the document (menu
37585 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37586 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37587 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37589 \begin_inset space ~
37593 \begin_inset space ~
37599 \begin_inset space ~
37603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37605 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37609 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37612 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37613 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37615 \begin_inset space ~
37618 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37620 \begin_inset space ~
37623 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37625 \begin_inset space ~
37629 \begin_inset space ~
37635 \begin_inset space ~
37639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37641 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37645 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37646 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37648 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37649 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37651 \begin_inset space ~
37654 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37656 \begin_inset space ~
37659 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37663 \begin_inset space ~
37667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37669 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37674 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37675 when it is first configured.
37676 The default output format is
37679 \begin_inset space ~
37687 \begin_layout Subsection
37688 View (Other Formats)
37691 \begin_layout Standard
37692 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37693 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37694 actual document with an external program.
37695 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37696 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37697 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37699 All possible formats are listed in section
37700 \begin_inset space ~
37704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37706 reference "subsec:Export"
37711 You should at least see the menu entry
37716 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37718 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37720 \begin_inset space ~
37724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37726 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37731 \begin_inset Index idx
37734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37735 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37744 \begin_layout Standard
37745 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37746 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37748 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37749 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37751 \begin_inset space ~
37754 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37756 \begin_inset space ~
37759 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37763 \begin_inset space ~
37767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37769 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37774 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37775 when it is first configured.
37778 \begin_layout Subsection
37780 \begin_inset space ~
37786 \begin_layout Standard
37787 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37788 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37791 \begin_layout Subsection
37792 Update (Other Formats)
37795 \begin_layout Standard
37796 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37797 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37800 \begin_layout Subsection
37801 View Master Document
37804 \begin_layout Standard
37805 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37821 \begin_inset space ~
37826 manual for more information on this topic).
37827 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37828 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37832 \begin_inset space ~
37836 \begin_inset space ~
37841 generates the output of the whole book, while
37845 will just output the chapter alone.
37848 \begin_layout Standard
37849 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37850 in the document settings (menu
37852 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37853 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37854 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37856 \begin_inset space ~
37860 \begin_inset space ~
37866 \begin_inset space ~
37870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37872 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37876 ) or in the preferences (menu
37878 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37879 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37881 \begin_inset space ~
37884 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37886 \begin_inset space ~
37889 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37891 \begin_inset space ~
37895 \begin_inset space ~
37901 \begin_inset space ~
37905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37907 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37914 \begin_layout Subsection
37915 Update Master Document
37918 \begin_layout Standard
37919 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37935 \begin_inset space ~
37940 manual for more information on this topic).
37941 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37942 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37945 \begin_layout Standard
37946 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37947 in the document settings (menu
37949 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37950 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37951 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37953 \begin_inset space ~
37957 \begin_inset space ~
37963 \begin_inset space ~
37967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37969 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37973 ) or in the preferences (menu
37975 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37976 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37978 \begin_inset space ~
37981 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37983 \begin_inset space ~
37986 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37988 \begin_inset space ~
37992 \begin_inset space ~
37998 \begin_inset space ~
38002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38004 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38011 \begin_layout Subsection
38013 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38015 name "subsec:Compressed"
38022 \begin_layout Standard
38023 Un/compresses the current document.
38024 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
38025 compression (see the
38027 Additional Features
38029 manual for details).
38032 \begin_layout Subsection
38036 \begin_layout Standard
38037 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
38040 \begin_layout Subsection
38044 \begin_layout Standard
38045 The document settings are described in appendix
38046 \begin_inset space ~
38050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38052 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
38059 \begin_layout Section
38061 \begin_inset Index idx
38064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38073 \begin_layout Subsection
38077 \begin_layout Standard
38078 Spell checking is explained in section
38079 \begin_inset space ~
38083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38085 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
38092 \begin_layout Subsection
38096 \begin_layout Standard
38097 The thesaurus is described in section
38098 \begin_inset space ~
38102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38104 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
38111 \begin_layout Subsection
38113 \begin_inset Index idx
38116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38123 \begin_inset Index idx
38126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38135 \begin_layout Standard
38136 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
38137 the highlighted document part.
38140 \begin_layout Subsection
38146 \begin_inset Index idx
38149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38150 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38159 \begin_layout Standard
38160 Generates with the help of the program
38162 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38165 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
38166 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
38167 This feature is not available on Windows.
38170 \begin_layout Subsection
38176 \begin_inset Index idx
38179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38189 \begin_layout Standard
38190 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38195 \begin_inset space ~
38200 to see the full filename paths.
38203 \begin_layout Subsection
38205 \begin_inset Index idx
38208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38217 \begin_layout Standard
38218 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
38219 files as described in section
38220 \begin_inset space ~
38224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38226 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38233 \begin_layout Subsection
38235 \begin_inset Index idx
38238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38251 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38269 \begin_inset Index idx
38272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38273 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38282 \begin_layout Standard
38283 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
38284 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
38285 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38286 -packages and programs it needs; see
38288 \begin_inset space ~
38292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38294 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38301 \begin_layout Subsection
38305 \begin_layout Standard
38310 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38311 \begin_inset space ~
38315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38317 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38324 \begin_layout Section
38326 \begin_inset Index idx
38329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38338 \begin_layout Standard
38339 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
38340 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
38342 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38346 \begin_layout Standard
38350 \begin_inset space ~
38355 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
38356 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38357 packages and classes found
38358 by \SpecialChar LyX
38360 \begin_inset space ~
38364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38366 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38373 \begin_layout Standard
38377 \begin_inset space ~
38382 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38387 \begin_layout Section
38389 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38391 name "sec:Toolbars"
38398 \begin_layout Standard
38399 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38400 \begin_inset space ~
38404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38406 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38413 \begin_layout Standard
38414 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38415 This is described in the
38417 Additional Features
38422 \begin_layout Subsection
38424 \begin_inset Index idx
38427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38436 \begin_layout Standard
38437 \begin_inset Graphics
38438 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38446 \begin_layout Standard
38447 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38453 \begin_layout Standard
38454 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38471 \begin_inset Note Note
38474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38475 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38480 manual for more information.
38488 \begin_layout Standard
38489 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38495 \begin_layout Standard
38496 \begin_inset Tabular
38497 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38498 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38499 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38500 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38506 \begin_inset Graphics
38507 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38521 pull-down box for the environments
38534 \begin_layout Standard
38535 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38541 \begin_layout Standard
38543 \begin_inset Tabular
38544 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38545 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38546 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38547 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38548 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38571 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38578 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38601 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38608 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38631 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38638 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38647 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38661 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38668 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38677 arg "spelling-continuously"
38685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38689 Spellcheck continuously
38695 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38718 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38725 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38748 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38755 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38778 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38785 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38808 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38815 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38838 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38845 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38854 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38868 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38870 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38874 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38878 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38887 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38894 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38908 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38910 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38914 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38918 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38927 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38936 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38950 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38951 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
38958 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38979 Emphasize text, function of the
38981 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38983 \begin_inset space ~
38986 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38995 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39016 Set text to noun style, function of the
39018 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39020 \begin_inset space ~
39023 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39032 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39041 arg "textstyle-apply"
39049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39053 Format text using the current settings in the
39055 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39057 \begin_inset space ~
39060 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39069 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39092 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39093 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39095 \begin_inset space ~
39104 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39113 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
39121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39127 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39134 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39141 arg "tabular-insert"
39149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39155 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39162 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39171 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
39179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39183 Toggle outline window on/off,
39185 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
39192 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39201 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
39209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39213 Toggle math toolbar on/off
39219 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39228 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
39236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39240 Toggle table toolbar on/off
39253 \begin_layout Subsection
39255 \begin_inset Index idx
39258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39267 \begin_layout Standard
39268 \begin_inset Graphics
39269 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39277 \begin_layout Standard
39278 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39284 \begin_layout Standard
39285 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39289 \begin_layout Standard
39290 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39296 \begin_layout Standard
39297 \begin_inset Tabular
39298 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39299 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39300 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39301 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39302 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39329 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39338 arg "layout Enumerate"
39346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39356 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39365 arg "layout Itemize"
39373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39383 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39410 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39419 arg "layout Description"
39427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39437 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39446 arg "depth-increment"
39454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39460 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39462 \begin_inset space ~
39466 \begin_inset space ~
39475 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39484 arg "depth-decrement"
39492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39498 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39500 \begin_inset space ~
39504 \begin_inset space ~
39513 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39522 arg "float-insert figure"
39530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39536 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39537 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39544 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39553 arg "float-insert table"
39561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39567 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39568 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39575 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39598 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39605 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39614 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39628 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39635 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39644 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39658 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39665 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39688 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39690 \begin_inset space ~
39699 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39708 arg "nomencl-insert"
39716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39722 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39724 \begin_inset space ~
39733 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39742 arg "footnote-insert"
39750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39756 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39763 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39772 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39786 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39788 \begin_inset space ~
39797 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39820 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39821 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39823 \begin_inset space ~
39832 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39841 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39855 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39862 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39885 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39892 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39915 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39917 \begin_inset space ~
39926 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39935 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39949 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39950 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39957 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39966 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39980 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39981 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39983 \begin_inset space ~
39992 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40001 arg "dialog-show character"
40009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40015 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40017 \begin_inset space ~
40020 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
40027 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40036 arg "layout-paragraph"
40044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40050 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40052 \begin_inset space ~
40061 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40070 arg "thesaurus-entry"
40078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40084 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40098 \begin_layout Subsection
40099 View/Update Toolbar
40100 \begin_inset Index idx
40103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40104 Toolbar ! View / Update
40112 \begin_layout Standard
40113 \begin_inset Graphics
40114 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
40121 \begin_layout Standard
40122 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40128 \begin_layout Standard
40129 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40133 \begin_layout Standard
40134 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40140 \begin_layout Standard
40141 \begin_inset Tabular
40142 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
40143 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40144 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40145 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40146 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40169 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40176 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40185 arg "buffer-update"
40193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40199 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40206 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40215 arg "master-buffer-view"
40223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40229 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40231 \begin_inset space ~
40240 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40249 arg "master-buffer-update"
40257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40263 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40265 \begin_inset space ~
40269 \begin_inset space ~
40278 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40287 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40301 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40302 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40303 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40304 Synchronize with Output
40310 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40333 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40334 View (Other Formats)
40340 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40347 arg "update-others"
40355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40361 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40362 Update (Other Formats)
40375 \begin_layout Standard
40376 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40380 \begin_layout Subsection
40384 \begin_layout Standard
40385 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40386 \begin_inset space ~
40390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40392 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40396 , the table toolbar
40397 \begin_inset Index idx
40400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40409 \begin_inset space ~
40414 manual and the math macro toolbar
40415 \begin_inset Index idx
40418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40431 \begin_layout Chapter
40432 The Document Settings
40433 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40435 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40440 \begin_inset Index idx
40443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40444 Document ! Settings
40452 \begin_layout Standard
40456 \begin_inset space ~
40461 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40462 is called with the menu
40464 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40468 You can save your document settings as default with the
40470 Save as Document Defaults
40472 button in any dialog.
40473 This will create a template named
40477 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40478 when you create a new document without
40482 \begin_layout Standard
40487 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40488 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40491 \begin_layout Standard
40492 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40493 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40494 to find the one you are looking for.
40495 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40496 the submenus of the dialog.
40498 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40502 \begin_inset space \space{}
40506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40513 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40514 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40515 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40518 \begin_layout Section
40522 \begin_layout Standard
40523 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40525 Document classes are described in section
40526 \begin_inset space ~
40530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40532 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40540 \begin_layout Standard
40544 \begin_inset space ~
40549 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40554 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40555 as a layout for a document class.
40556 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40558 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40567 \begin_layout Standard
40568 Some classes use special class options by default.
40569 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40573 and you can decide to use them or not.
40574 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40575 recommended you leave them untouched.
40580 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40581 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40586 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40588 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40594 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40595 \begin_inset Newline newline
40600 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40603 \begin_inset Newline newline
40606 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40607 distribution, see section
40612 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40614 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40626 \begin_layout Standard
40631 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40632 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40633 in the background if the child document
40634 is opened without its master.
40635 This way child documents are always compilable.
40636 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40643 \begin_inset space ~
40651 \begin_layout Standard
40652 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40663 \begin_inset Index idx
40666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40668 -packages ! prettyref
40674 \begin_inset Index idx
40677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40679 -packages ! refstyle
40684 for cross-references, see section
40685 \begin_inset space ~
40689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40691 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40698 \begin_layout Section
40702 \begin_layout Standard
40703 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40704 Please refer to the section
40707 \begin_inset space ~
40715 \begin_inset space ~
40720 manual for details.
40723 \begin_layout Section
40727 \begin_layout Standard
40728 Modules are explained in section
40729 \begin_inset space ~
40733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40735 reference "subsec:Modules"
40742 \begin_layout Section
40746 \begin_layout Standard
40748 \begin_inset space ~
40752 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40754 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
40761 \begin_layout Section
40765 \begin_layout Standard
40766 The document font settings are described in section
40767 \begin_inset space ~
40771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40773 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40780 \begin_layout Section
40784 \begin_layout Standard
40785 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40797 \begin_inset space ~
40802 and whether it should be a
40805 \begin_inset space ~
40810 can also be specified here.
40813 \begin_layout Standard
40814 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
40815 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
40816 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40818 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40821 \begin_layout Standard
40824 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
40827 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
40828 justifies the text on screen.
40829 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
40833 \begin_layout Section
40837 \begin_layout Standard
40838 This dialog is described in sections
40839 \begin_inset space ~
40843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40845 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40852 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
40859 \begin_layout Section
40863 \begin_layout Standard
40864 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40865 \begin_inset space ~
40869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40871 reference "subsec:Margins"
40878 \begin_layout Section
40880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40882 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40887 \begin_inset Index idx
40890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40891 Language ! Encoding
40899 \begin_layout Standard
40900 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40901 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40902 (the \SpecialChar LyX
40904 is always encoded in utf8).
40905 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40906 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40907 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40908 -command is not known for
40909 a particular character).
40912 \begin_layout Standard
40913 If you use the option
40918 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40919 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40920 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40922 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40923 exactly one encoding.
40924 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40927 \begin_layout Standard
40929 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40930 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40931 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40932 installation supports Unicode), choose
40933 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40934 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40935 is quite incomplete, so
40936 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40941 (when \SpecialChar LyX
40942 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40943 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
40944 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40945 -commands is not used, because all
40946 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40947 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40948 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40949 , two new alternative engines
40950 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40952 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40954 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40957 \begin_inset space ~
40965 \begin_inset space ~
40973 \begin_inset space ~
40979 \begin_inset space ~
40983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40985 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40990 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40994 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40997 \begin_layout Standard
41001 \begin_inset space ~
41006 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41007 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
41009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41017 The possible settings are:
41020 \begin_layout Description
41021 Default uses the language package that is selected in
41023 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41024 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41028 \begin_inset space ~
41032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41034 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
41041 \begin_layout Description
41042 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
41043 format you will use.
41044 In many cases this will be
41049 \begin_inset Index idx
41052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41060 If the newer package
41065 \begin_inset Index idx
41068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41070 -packages ! polyglossia
41075 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41076 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41077 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
41079 this package will be used instead of
41086 \begin_layout Description
41088 \begin_inset space ~
41099 would be more appropriate.
41102 \begin_layout Description
41103 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
41104 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
41108 (for German texts), type in
41111 \begin_inset Newline newline
41116 usepackage{ngerman}
41119 \begin_layout Description
41120 None will not use a language package.
41121 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
41124 \begin_layout Standard
41125 Here is a list with the important encodings:
41128 \begin_layout Description
41130 \begin_inset space ~
41134 \begin_inset space ~
41138 \begin_inset space ~
41145 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41151 \begin_inset Index idx
41154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41156 -packages ! inputenc
41162 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
41163 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
41164 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
41168 \begin_layout Description
41169 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
41171 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
41172 commands, which may result in a big
41173 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
41174 -commands are needed.
41177 \begin_layout Description
41179 \begin_inset space ~
41183 \begin_inset space ~
41186 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
41189 \begin_layout Description
41191 \begin_inset space ~
41195 \begin_inset space ~
41198 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
41201 \begin_layout Description
41203 \begin_inset space ~
41206 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
41209 \begin_layout Description
41211 \begin_inset space ~
41215 \begin_inset space ~
41218 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
41219 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
41222 \begin_layout Description
41224 \begin_inset space ~
41228 \begin_inset space ~
41231 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
41235 \begin_layout Description
41237 \begin_inset space ~
41241 \begin_inset space ~
41244 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
41245 ISO-8859-13 encoding
41248 \begin_layout Description
41250 \begin_inset space ~
41254 \begin_inset space ~
41258 \begin_inset space ~
41261 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
41262 \begin_inset space ~
41268 \begin_layout Description
41270 \begin_inset space ~
41274 \begin_inset space ~
41278 \begin_inset space ~
41281 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41282 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41285 \begin_layout Description
41287 \begin_inset space ~
41291 \begin_inset space ~
41294 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41295 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41296 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41297 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41298 \begin_inset space ~
41302 \begin_inset space ~
41308 \begin_layout Description
41310 \begin_inset space ~
41314 \begin_inset space ~
41317 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41318 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41319 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41321 should try to use the encoding Unicode
41322 \begin_inset space ~
41326 \begin_inset space ~
41332 \begin_layout Description
41334 \begin_inset space ~
41338 \begin_inset space ~
41341 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41344 \begin_layout Description
41346 \begin_inset space ~
41350 \begin_inset space ~
41353 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41356 \begin_layout Description
41358 \begin_inset space ~
41362 \begin_inset space ~
41365 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41368 \begin_layout Description
41370 \begin_inset space ~
41373 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41376 \begin_layout Description
41378 \begin_inset space ~
41381 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41384 \begin_layout Description
41386 \begin_inset space ~
41390 \begin_inset space ~
41393 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41396 \begin_layout Description
41398 \begin_inset space ~
41402 \begin_inset space ~
41408 \begin_layout Description
41410 \begin_inset space ~
41414 \begin_inset space ~
41417 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41420 \begin_layout Description
41422 \begin_inset space ~
41426 \begin_inset space ~
41432 \begin_layout Description
41434 \begin_inset space ~
41438 \begin_inset space ~
41441 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41447 \begin_inset Index idx
41450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41457 , when using this, set the document language to
41462 \begin_layout Description
41464 \begin_inset space ~
41468 \begin_inset space ~
41471 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41476 , when using this, set the document language to
41479 \begin_inset space ~
41485 \begin_layout Description
41487 \begin_inset space ~
41491 \begin_inset space ~
41494 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41500 \begin_inset Index idx
41503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41505 -packages ! japanese
41510 , when using this, set the document language to
41515 \begin_layout Description
41517 \begin_inset space ~
41521 \begin_inset space ~
41524 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41529 , when using this, set the document language to
41534 \begin_layout Description
41536 \begin_inset space ~
41540 \begin_inset space ~
41543 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41548 , when using this, set the document language to
41553 \begin_layout Description
41555 \begin_inset space ~
41558 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41561 \begin_layout Description
41563 \begin_inset space ~
41567 \begin_inset space ~
41571 \begin_inset space ~
41574 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41577 \begin_layout Description
41579 \begin_inset space ~
41583 \begin_inset space ~
41587 \begin_inset space ~
41590 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41591 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41592 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41595 \begin_layout Description
41597 \begin_inset space ~
41601 \begin_inset space ~
41607 \begin_layout Description
41609 \begin_inset space ~
41613 \begin_inset space ~
41616 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41617 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41620 \begin_layout Description
41622 \begin_inset space ~
41626 \begin_inset space ~
41629 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41635 \begin_inset Index idx
41638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41645 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41648 \begin_layout Description
41650 \begin_inset space ~
41658 \begin_inset space ~
41661 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41668 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41671 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41678 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41679 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41681 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41684 \begin_layout Description
41686 \begin_inset space ~
41690 \begin_inset space ~
41693 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41699 \begin_inset Index idx
41702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41709 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41712 \begin_layout Description
41714 \begin_inset space ~
41717 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41723 \begin_inset Index idx
41726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41728 -packages ! inputenc
41734 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41738 \begin_layout Description
41740 \begin_inset space ~
41744 \begin_inset space ~
41748 \begin_inset space ~
41751 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41752 \begin_inset space ~
41758 \begin_layout Description
41760 \begin_inset space ~
41764 \begin_inset space ~
41768 \begin_inset space ~
41771 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41772 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41773 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41777 \begin_layout Description
41779 \begin_inset space ~
41783 \begin_inset space ~
41787 \begin_inset space ~
41790 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41791 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41794 \begin_layout Section
41796 \begin_inset Index idx
41799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41806 \begin_inset Index idx
41809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41816 \begin_inset Index idx
41819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41820 Color ! Shaded boxes
41826 \begin_inset Index idx
41829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41830 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41838 \begin_layout Standard
41839 Here you can alter the font color for the
41843 (default: black), for
41846 \begin_inset space ~
41851 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41855 (default: white) and for
41858 \begin_inset space ~
41868 sets the color back to the default.
41871 \begin_layout Standard
41872 Clicking any button showing
41880 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41881 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41882 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41883 later more quickly.
41886 \begin_layout Standard
41887 Note, if you change the
41890 \begin_inset space ~
41895 font color and use the option
41898 \begin_inset space ~
41903 in the document settings under
41906 \begin_inset space ~
41911 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41912 \begin_inset space ~
41916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41918 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41925 \begin_layout Standard
41926 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41932 \begin_layout Standard
41936 \begin_inset space ~
41945 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41948 \begin_inset space ~
41951 Code after a forced page break:
41954 \begin_layout Itemize
41955 For the page color:
41956 \begin_inset Newline newline
41963 pagecolor{color name}
41966 \begin_layout Itemize
41967 For the text color:
41968 \begin_inset Newline newline
41978 \begin_layout Standard
41979 You are restricted to one of
42015 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
42022 \begin_inset space ~
42028 \begin_inset Newline newline
42031 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
42032 names to refer to them:
42035 \begin_layout Itemize
42041 \begin_inset Newline newline
42046 page_backgroundcolor
42049 \begin_layout Itemize
42053 \begin_inset space ~
42059 \begin_inset Newline newline
42067 \begin_layout Itemize
42071 \begin_inset space ~
42077 \begin_inset Newline newline
42085 \begin_layout Itemize
42089 \begin_inset space ~
42095 \begin_inset Newline newline
42103 \begin_layout Standard
42104 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
42107 \begin_inset space ~
42115 \begin_inset space ~
42123 \begin_layout Section
42127 \begin_layout Standard
42128 Here you can adjust the
42132 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
42136 as described in section
42137 \begin_inset space ~
42141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42143 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
42150 \begin_layout Section
42154 \begin_layout Standard
42155 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42161 \begin_inset Index idx
42164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42176 \begin_inset Index idx
42179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42181 -packages ! jurabib
42189 Sectioned bibliography
42191 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42197 \begin_inset Index idx
42200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42202 -packages ! bibtopic
42207 and you can select a
42211 for the generation of the bibliography.
42212 For a further description see section
42213 \begin_inset space ~
42217 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42219 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42226 \begin_layout Section
42230 \begin_layout Standard
42231 Here you can define the
42235 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
42237 \begin_inset space ~
42241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42243 reference "sec:Index"
42250 \begin_layout Section
42254 \begin_layout Standard
42255 The PDF properties are explained in section
42256 \begin_inset space ~
42260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42262 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42269 \begin_layout Section
42273 \begin_layout Standard
42274 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
42275 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42281 \begin_inset Index idx
42284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42286 -packages ! amsmath
42296 \begin_inset Index idx
42299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42301 -packages ! amssymb
42311 \begin_inset Index idx
42314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42326 \begin_inset Index idx
42329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42341 \begin_inset Index idx
42344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42346 -packages ! mathdots
42356 \begin_inset Index idx
42359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42361 -packages ! mathtools
42371 \begin_inset Index idx
42374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42386 \begin_inset Index idx
42389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42391 -packages ! stackrel
42401 \begin_inset Index idx
42404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42406 -packages ! stmaryrd
42416 \begin_inset Index idx
42419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42421 -packages ! undertilde
42426 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42429 \begin_layout Description
42430 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42431 -errors in formulas,
42432 ensure that you have this enabled.
42435 \begin_layout Description
42436 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42437 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42438 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42442 \begin_layout Description
42443 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42446 \begin_inset space ~
42458 \begin_layout Description
42459 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42462 \begin_inset space ~
42474 \begin_layout Description
42475 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42486 \begin_layout Description
42487 mathtools is used for the math commands
42523 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42530 \begin_layout Description
42531 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42533 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42542 \begin_layout Description
42543 stackrel is used for the math command
42560 \begin_layout Description
42561 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42564 \begin_layout Description
42565 undertilde is used for the math command
42573 Accents for one Character
42582 \begin_layout Section
42586 \begin_layout Standard
42587 The float placement options are described in the section
42590 \begin_inset space ~
42598 \begin_inset space ~
42606 \begin_layout Section
42610 \begin_layout Standard
42611 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42613 Program Code Listings
42618 \begin_inset space ~
42626 \begin_layout Section
42630 \begin_layout Standard
42631 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42639 set to be used and set the
42644 The itemize environment is described in section
42645 \begin_inset space ~
42649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42651 reference "sec:Itemize"
42658 \begin_layout Standard
42659 You can furthermore specify a
42662 \begin_inset space ~
42667 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42668 command of the desired character.
42669 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42676 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42678 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42682 \begin_inset space \space{}
42686 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42696 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42697 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42700 \begin_layout Standard
42701 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42709 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42710 -packages in the preamble (menu
42713 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42714 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42717 \begin_inset space ~
42723 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42727 usepackage{textcomp}
42730 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42734 usepackage{amssymb}
42744 \begin_layout Section
42748 \begin_layout Standard
42749 Branches are described in section
42750 \begin_inset space ~
42754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42756 reference "sec:Branches"
42763 \begin_layout Section
42765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42767 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42774 \begin_layout Standard
42775 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42778 \begin_layout Description
42780 \begin_inset space ~
42784 \begin_inset space ~
42787 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42807 View Master Document
42808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42815 Update Master Document
42816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42823 menu or the toolbar.
42824 The default is set in
42826 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42827 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42829 \begin_inset space ~
42832 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42836 \begin_inset space ~
42840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42842 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42849 \begin_layout Description
42851 \begin_inset space ~
42855 \begin_inset space ~
42858 Output settings for the menu
42860 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42862 \begin_inset space ~
42868 For a detailed description see section
42870 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42875 \begin_inset space ~
42883 \begin_layout Description
42885 \begin_inset space ~
42889 \begin_inset space ~
42892 Options offers settings for the export format
42900 \begin_inset space ~
42905 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42906 \begin_inset space ~
42909 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42913 \begin_inset space ~
42918 settings are described in detail in section
42920 Math Output in XHTML
42925 \begin_inset space ~
42934 \begin_inset space ~
42938 \begin_inset space ~
42943 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42946 \begin_layout Section
42954 \begin_layout Standard
42955 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42957 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
42959 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42961 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42965 \begin_layout Standard
42966 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42967 -syntax is given in section
42968 \begin_inset space ~
42972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42974 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
42981 \begin_layout Chapter
42987 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42989 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42994 \begin_inset Index idx
42997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43006 \begin_layout Standard
43007 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
43009 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43013 It has the following submenus.
43016 \begin_layout Section
43020 \begin_layout Subsection
43024 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43025 User Interface File
43026 \begin_inset Index idx
43029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43030 Customization ! of toolbars
43036 \begin_inset Index idx
43039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43040 Customization ! of menus
43048 \begin_layout Standard
43049 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
43050 interface (ui) file.
43051 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
43059 \begin_layout Description
43064 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
43067 \begin_layout Description
43074 the menu entries in popup context menus
43077 \begin_layout Description
43082 specifies the toolbar buttons
43085 \begin_layout Standard
43086 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
43087 and edit the entries.
43090 \begin_layout Standard
43091 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
43103 entries must be finished with an explicit
43128 and in the case of the
43129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43141 The syntax for the entries is:
43144 \begin_layout Standard
43145 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43174 \begin_layout Standard
43176 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43179 All the \SpecialChar LyX
43180 -functions are listed in the menu
43182 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
43184 \begin_inset space ~
43192 \begin_layout Standard
43193 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
43199 \begin_layout Standard
43200 For example, assuming you use the menu
43202 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43205 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
43209 \begin_layout Standard
43210 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43234 \begin_layout Standard
43236 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43251 to have the sixth bookmark.
43254 \begin_layout Standard
43258 \begin_inset space ~
43263 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
43264 's toolbar buttons.
43265 The currently available icon sets are compared in
43266 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43269 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
43276 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43280 \begin_layout Standard
43283 Enable tool tips in main work area
43285 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43289 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43293 \begin_layout Standard
43298 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
43299 should display in the menu
43301 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43303 \begin_inset space ~
43311 \begin_layout Subsection
43315 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43319 \begin_layout Standard
43322 Restore window layouts and geometries
43325 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
43326 the last \SpecialChar LyX
43330 \begin_layout Standard
43333 Restore cursor positions
43335 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43339 \begin_layout Standard
43342 Load opened files from last session
43344 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
43348 \begin_layout Standard
43351 Clear all session information
43353 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43354 sessions (cursor positions, names
43355 of last opened documents, etc.).
43358 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43360 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43362 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43367 \begin_inset Index idx
43370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43379 \begin_layout Standard
43382 Backup original documents when saving
43384 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43385 it was saved the last time.
43386 It is stored in the
43389 \begin_inset space ~
43395 \begin_inset space ~
43399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43401 reference "sec:Paths"
43405 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43408 \begin_inset space ~
43414 The backup file has the file extension
43415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43429 \begin_layout Standard
43432 Backup documents, every
43434 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43437 \begin_layout Standard
43440 Save documents compressed by default
43442 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
43443 \begin_inset space ~
43447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43449 reference "subsec:Compressed"
43454 This applies to newly created documents only.
43455 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
43458 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43459 Windows & work area
43462 \begin_layout Standard
43465 Open documents in tabs
43467 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43471 \begin_layout Standard
43476 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43483 \begin_inset space ~
43487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43489 reference "sec:Paths"
43493 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43500 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43501 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43502 of \SpecialChar LyX
43504 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43505 instance is created for each file.
43508 \begin_layout Standard
43511 Single close-tab button
43513 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43523 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43524 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43527 \begin_layout Standard
43528 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43536 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43537 before the change takes effect.
43545 \begin_layout Standard
43550 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43552 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43554 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43558 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43559 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43560 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43563 \begin_layout Subsection
43565 \begin_inset Index idx
43568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43575 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43577 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43584 \begin_layout Standard
43585 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43589 \begin_layout Standard
43590 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43598 This section only deals with the fonts
43602 the \SpecialChar LyX
43604 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43607 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43608 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43619 \begin_layout Standard
43620 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43637 (depends on the system) as its
43640 \begin_inset space ~
43656 \begin_layout Standard
43657 You can change the font size with the
43664 \begin_layout Standard
43669 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43671 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43674 points have the size of 1
43675 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43679 \begin_inset space ~
43683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43685 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43690 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43691 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43695 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43696 \begin_inset space ~
43700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43702 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
43709 \begin_layout Standard
43712 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43714 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
43715 needs to redraw the screen less often.
43716 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43717 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43718 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43720 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43721 \begin_inset space ~
43727 \begin_layout Subsection
43729 \begin_inset Index idx
43732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43733 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
43740 \begin_inset Index idx
43743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43752 \begin_layout Standard
43753 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
43754 by choosing an item in the
43755 list and selecting the
43762 \begin_layout Standard
43763 By checking the option
43767 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43770 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43771 \begin_inset space ~
43775 \begin_inset space ~
43780 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43783 \begin_layout Subsection
43785 \begin_inset Index idx
43788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43797 \begin_layout Standard
43798 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
43802 \begin_layout Standard
43807 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43808 This feature is described in section
43809 \begin_inset space ~
43813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43815 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43822 \begin_layout Standard
43823 Checking the option
43826 \begin_inset space ~
43830 \begin_inset space ~
43834 \begin_inset space ~
43839 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43842 \begin_layout Section
43844 \begin_inset Index idx
43847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43856 \begin_layout Subsection
43860 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43864 \begin_layout Standard
43867 Cursor follows scrollbar
43869 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43873 \begin_layout Standard
43874 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43875 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43876 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43879 \begin_layout Standard
43882 Scroll below end of document
43884 is self-explanatory.
43887 \begin_layout Standard
43888 In \SpecialChar LyX
43889 one can jump from word to word by pressing
43896 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43898 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43899 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43902 \begin_layout Standard
43905 Sort environments alphabetically
43907 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43910 \begin_layout Standard
43913 Group environments by their category
43915 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43918 \begin_layout Standard
43923 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43934 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43938 \begin_layout Standard
43939 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43944 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43945 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43949 \begin_layout Subsection
43951 \begin_inset Index idx
43954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43961 \begin_inset Index idx
43964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43965 Settings ! Shortcuts
43973 \begin_layout Standard
43978 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
43980 Several binding files are available, among them:
43983 \begin_layout Description
43984 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43987 \begin_layout Description
43988 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
44000 \begin_layout Description
44001 mac.bind a set of bindings for
44004 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44012 \begin_layout Standard
44013 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
44018 , and binding files for special languages.
44019 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
44020 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44024 \begin_inset space \space{}
44028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44036 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
44037 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
44038 will try to use the appropriate binding
44042 \begin_layout Standard
44043 Some binding files, like
44047 , only have a limited scope.
44048 When looking at the end of the file
44052 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
44055 \begin_layout Standard
44059 \begin_inset space ~
44063 \begin_inset space ~
44068 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
44069 in the selected key binding file.
44072 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44074 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44076 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
44081 \begin_inset Index idx
44084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44085 Key Bindings ! Editing
44093 \begin_layout Standard
44094 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
44095 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
44096 functions and the bound shortcuts.
44097 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
44100 Show key-bindings containing
44103 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
44104 Insert there for example as keyword
44105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44112 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
44113 functions that contain
44114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44122 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
44123 All \SpecialChar LyX
44124 functions are also listed in the file
44129 that you will find in the
44136 \begin_layout Standard
44137 For example, to add the shortcut
44145 , select the function and press the
44150 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
44151 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
44154 \begin_layout Standard
44155 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
44156 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
44158 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
44159 function names as a semicolon separated list.
44161 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
44166 \begin_layout Standard
44167 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
44170 \begin_layout Standard
44171 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
44173 The syntax of the entries is:
44176 \begin_layout Standard
44182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44201 \begin_layout Subsection
44203 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44205 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
44210 \begin_inset Index idx
44213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44220 \begin_inset Index idx
44223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44224 Settings ! Keyboard Map
44232 \begin_layout Standard
44233 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
44234 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
44235 provides keyboard maps.
44236 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
44237 is a Romanian one, you can enable
44240 \begin_inset space ~
44244 \begin_inset space ~
44249 and select the keyboard map file named
44256 \begin_layout Standard
44265 keyboard map and, if you use the
44269 bindings, you can select the first and second with
44272 arg "keymap-primary"
44278 arg "keymap-secondary"
44281 respectively or toggle between them with
44284 arg "keymap-toggle"
44290 \begin_layout Standard
44291 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44299 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44308 \begin_layout Standard
44309 You can also specify the mouse
44311 Wheel scrolling speed
44314 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44318 Middle mouse button pasting
44320 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
44321 inserts the content of the clipboard.
44324 \begin_layout Standard
44332 \begin_inset space ~
44336 \begin_inset space ~
44341 you can select a key for zooming.
44342 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44345 \begin_layout Subsection
44349 \begin_layout Standard
44350 Input completion is described in section
44351 \begin_inset space ~
44355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44357 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44364 \begin_layout Section
44366 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44373 \begin_inset Index idx
44376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44383 \begin_inset Index idx
44386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44395 \begin_layout Standard
44396 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
44397 are normally determined during
44399 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44402 \begin_layout Description
44404 \begin_inset space ~
44407 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44408 's working directory.
44409 It is the default when you
44420 \begin_inset space ~
44428 \begin_layout Description
44430 \begin_inset space ~
44433 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44435 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44437 \begin_inset space ~
44441 \begin_inset space ~
44449 \begin_layout Description
44451 \begin_inset space ~
44454 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44460 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44464 \begin_inset Newline newline
44468 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44480 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44481 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44489 \begin_layout Description
44491 \begin_inset space ~
44495 \begin_inset Index idx
44498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44504 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44505 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44506 \begin_inset space ~
44510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44512 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44520 will be used to save the backups.
44521 \begin_inset Newline newline
44524 Backup files have the ending
44525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44535 \begin_layout Description
44537 \begin_inset space ~
44540 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44541 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44543 \begin_inset Newline newline
44550 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44556 You can edit this file with the program
44565 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44566 in its preferences under
44569 \begin_inset space ~
44575 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44580 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44582 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44583 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44589 and \SpecialChar LyX
44590 need to be running the same time.
44591 \begin_inset Newline newline
44594 The pipe is also used for the
44598 feature, see section
44599 \begin_inset space ~
44603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44605 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44610 \begin_inset Newline newline
44613 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44614 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44615 \begin_inset Newline newline
44631 \begin_layout Description
44633 \begin_inset space ~
44636 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44639 \begin_layout Description
44641 \begin_inset space ~
44644 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44645 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44646 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44649 \begin_layout Description
44651 \begin_inset space ~
44654 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44660 You only need to specify it if you are using
44664 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44666 For \SpecialChar LyX
44671 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44675 \begin_layout Description
44677 \begin_inset space ~
44680 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44681 When \SpecialChar LyX
44682 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
44683 to find it on the system.
44684 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
44686 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44688 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44692 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44695 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44696 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44699 \begin_layout Description
44701 \begin_inset space ~
44704 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44705 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
44706 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
44707 code or in the document
44709 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44711 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44712 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44713 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44714 scanned for the input files.
44715 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44716 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
44718 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44719 compilation may fail for some documents.
44722 \begin_layout Section
44726 \begin_layout Standard
44727 Here you can insert your
44736 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44738 \begin_inset space ~
44742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44744 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44748 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44751 \begin_layout Section
44753 \begin_inset Index idx
44756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44757 Language ! Settings
44763 \begin_inset Index idx
44766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44767 Settings ! Language
44775 \begin_layout Subsection
44777 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44779 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44786 \begin_layout Description
44788 \begin_inset space ~
44792 \begin_inset space ~
44795 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
44797 You can find its actual translation status here:
44798 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44800 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44807 \begin_layout Description
44809 \begin_inset space ~
44812 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
44813 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
44814 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44815 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44832 The most widespread language package is
44837 \begin_inset Index idx
44840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44847 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
44849 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44850 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44851 come with the alternative
44857 \begin_inset Index idx
44860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44862 -packages ! polyglossia
44867 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44868 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44874 The available selections are described in section
44875 \begin_inset space ~
44879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44881 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44888 \begin_layout Description
44890 \begin_inset space ~
44893 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44894 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
44895 you can here specify the command to start the package.
44896 An example is the start command
44902 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44904 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
44908 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44923 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44928 \begin_layout Description
44930 \begin_inset space ~
44938 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44939 command toggles the package on and off.
44942 \begin_layout Description
44944 \begin_inset space ~
44948 \begin_inset space ~
44951 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44955 \begin_layout Description
44957 \begin_inset space ~
44961 \begin_inset space ~
44964 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
44968 \begin_layout Description
44970 \begin_inset space ~
44974 \begin_inset space ~
44977 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44978 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44979 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
44981 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44988 \begin_layout Description
44990 \begin_inset space ~
44993 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44995 When this option is not set, the
44998 \begin_inset space ~
45003 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45005 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
45008 \begin_inset space ~
45016 \begin_layout Description
45018 \begin_inset space ~
45024 \begin_inset space ~
45030 When it is not set, the
45033 \begin_inset space ~
45038 is set to the end of the document.
45041 \begin_layout Description
45043 \begin_inset space ~
45047 \begin_inset space ~
45050 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
45051 language will be underlined in blue.
45054 \begin_layout Description
45056 \begin_inset space ~
45060 \begin_inset space ~
45063 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
45064 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
45067 \begin_layout Description
45069 \begin_inset space ~
45072 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
45073 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
45074 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
45075 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
45078 \begin_layout Subsection
45082 \begin_layout Standard
45083 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
45084 \begin_inset space ~
45088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45090 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
45097 \begin_layout Section
45101 \begin_layout Subsection
45103 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45105 name "subsec:General-output"
45112 \begin_layout Description
45114 \begin_inset space ~
45117 search Commands that will be used for the menu
45119 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45121 \begin_inset space ~
45127 For a detailed description see section
45129 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45134 \begin_inset space ~
45142 \begin_layout Description
45144 \begin_inset space ~
45147 Options Options for the program
45151 that is used for the export format
45156 \begin_inset space ~
45160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45162 reference "subsec:Export"
45167 Possible options are listed in the
45172 \begin_inset Newline newline
45176 \begin_inset Flex URL
45179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45181 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
45191 \begin_layout Description
45193 \begin_inset space ~
45197 \begin_inset space ~
45200 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
45203 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45204 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
45206 \begin_inset space ~
45212 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
45215 \begin_layout Description
45217 \begin_inset space ~
45221 \begin_inset Index idx
45224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45231 \begin_inset Index idx
45234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45235 Settings ! Date format
45240 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
45241 \begin_inset Newline newline
45245 \begin_inset Flex URL
45248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45250 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
45256 \begin_inset Newline newline
45259 For example the format
45260 \begin_inset Newline newline
45264 \begin_inset Newline newline
45267 prints the date as day/month/year.
45270 \begin_layout Description
45272 \begin_inset space ~
45276 \begin_inset space ~
45279 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
45280 is allowed to overwrite on export.
45283 \begin_layout Subsection
45289 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45291 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
45296 \begin_inset Index idx
45299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45300 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
45309 \begin_layout Description
45311 \begin_inset space ~
45319 \begin_inset space ~
45323 \begin_inset space ~
45326 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45331 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45352 are used for Cyrillic.
45353 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45366 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45368 sets up in the background.
45369 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45372 \begin_layout Description
45374 \begin_inset space ~
45378 \begin_inset space ~
45382 \begin_inset space ~
45386 \begin_inset space ~
45389 options They only have an effect when the program
45393 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45396 \begin_layout Standard
45397 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45398 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45399 manuals of the applications.
45402 \begin_layout Description
45404 \begin_inset space ~
45407 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45408 \begin_inset space ~
45412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45414 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45421 \begin_layout Description
45423 \begin_inset space ~
45426 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45427 \begin_inset space ~
45431 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45433 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45440 \begin_layout Description
45442 \begin_inset space ~
45445 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45446 \begin_inset space ~
45450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45452 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45459 \begin_layout Description
45465 \begin_inset space ~
45468 command Command for the program
45470 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45473 that is described in the section
45475 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45480 Additional Features
45485 \begin_layout Standard
45486 There are additionally the following options:
45489 \begin_layout Description
45491 \begin_inset space ~
45495 \begin_inset space ~
45499 \begin_inset space ~
45503 \begin_inset space ~
45508 \begin_inset space ~
45511 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45529 to separate folders.
45530 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45532 \begin_inset Index idx
45535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45542 \begin_inset Index idx
45545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45554 \begin_layout Description
45556 \begin_inset space ~
45560 \begin_inset space ~
45564 \begin_inset space ~
45568 \begin_inset space ~
45572 \begin_inset space ~
45576 \begin_inset space ~
45579 changes Removes all manually set
45585 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45586 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45588 \begin_inset space ~
45593 dialog when changing the document class.
45596 \begin_layout Section
45598 \begin_inset space ~
45602 \begin_inset Index idx
45605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45614 \begin_layout Subsection
45616 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45618 name "subsec:Converters"
45623 \begin_inset Index idx
45626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45635 \begin_layout Standard
45636 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45637 from one format to another.
45638 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45639 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45646 \begin_inset space ~
45651 field and press the
45656 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45660 \begin_inset space ~
45665 drop-down list, modify the
45669 field and press the
45676 \begin_layout Standard
45679 Converter File Cache
45685 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45687 Maximum Age (in days
45690 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45691 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45694 \begin_layout Standard
45695 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45696 definition, is described in the section
45707 \begin_layout Subsection
45709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45711 name "sec:File-Formats"
45716 \begin_inset Index idx
45719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45726 \begin_inset Index idx
45729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45738 \begin_layout Standard
45739 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
45749 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45752 \begin_layout Standard
45753 You can also define the
45755 Default output format
45757 that is used when you use
45759 View, Update, View Master Document
45763 Update Master Document
45769 menu or the toolbar.
45772 \begin_layout Standard
45773 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45784 \begin_layout Standard
45785 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
45787 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45788 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45789 This is done by specifying a
45794 More about this is described in the section
45805 \begin_layout Chapter
45806 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45808 \begin_inset Index idx
45811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45818 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45820 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45827 \begin_layout Standard
45829 \begin_inset space ~
45833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45835 reference "tab:Units"
45839 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45840 and used in this documentation.
45843 \begin_layout Standard
45844 \begin_inset Float table
45850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45851 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45854 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45869 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45877 \begin_inset Tabular
45878 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
45879 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
45880 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45881 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45882 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46015 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46019 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46052 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46088 scaled point (65536
46089 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46093 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46126 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46130 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46163 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46167 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
46171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46204 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46208 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46240 % of original image width
46245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46526 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46556 \begin_layout Chapter
46558 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46560 name "chap:Credits"
46567 \begin_layout Standard
46568 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46569 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46572 \begin_layout Itemize
46575 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46578 \begin_layout Itemize
46584 \begin_layout Itemize
46590 \begin_layout Itemize
46596 \begin_layout Itemize
46602 \begin_layout Itemize
46608 \begin_layout Itemize
46614 \begin_layout Itemize
46620 \begin_layout Itemize
46623 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46626 \begin_layout Itemize
46632 \begin_layout Itemize
46638 \begin_layout Itemize
46644 \begin_layout Itemize
46650 \begin_layout Itemize
46656 \begin_layout Itemize
46662 \begin_layout Itemize
46668 \begin_layout Itemize
46674 \begin_layout Itemize
46675 The \SpecialChar LyX
46677 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46686 \begin_layout Standard
46687 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46690 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46697 \begin_layout Bibliography
46698 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46699 LatexCommand bibitem
46705 The \SpecialChar LyX
46707 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46710 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46715 \begin_inset Newline newline
46719 \begin_inset Flex URL
46722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46724 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46732 \begin_layout Bibliography
46733 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46734 LatexCommand bibitem
46735 key "latexcompanion"
46739 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46741 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46742 Companion Second Edition.
46745 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46748 \begin_layout Bibliography
46749 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46750 LatexCommand bibitem
46755 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46758 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46762 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46765 \begin_layout Bibliography
46766 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46767 LatexCommand bibitem
46775 : A Document Preparation System.
46778 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46781 \begin_layout Bibliography
46782 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46783 LatexCommand bibitem
46792 The \SpecialChar TeX
46796 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46799 \begin_layout Bibliography
46800 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46801 LatexCommand bibitem
46806 The \SpecialChar TeX
46808 \begin_inset Newline newline
46812 \begin_inset Flex URL
46815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46817 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46825 \begin_layout Bibliography
46826 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46827 LatexCommand bibitem
46832 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46834 \begin_inset Newline newline
46838 \begin_inset Flex URL
46841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46843 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
46851 \begin_layout Bibliography
46852 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46853 LatexCommand bibitem
46859 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46861 name "Documentation"
46862 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46868 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46872 \begin_inset Newline newline
46876 \begin_inset Flex URL
46879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46881 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46889 \begin_layout Bibliography
46890 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46891 LatexCommand bibitem
46897 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46899 name "Documentation"
46900 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46904 how to use the program
46906 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46910 \begin_inset Newline newline
46914 \begin_inset Flex URL
46917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46919 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46927 \begin_layout Bibliography
46928 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46929 LatexCommand bibitem
46935 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46937 name "Documentation"
46938 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46947 \begin_inset Newline newline
46951 \begin_inset Flex URL
46954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46956 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46964 \begin_layout Bibliography
46965 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46966 LatexCommand bibitem
46967 key "makeindex-man"
46972 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46975 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
46984 \begin_inset Newline newline
46988 \begin_inset Flex URL
46991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46993 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
47001 \begin_layout Bibliography
47002 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47003 LatexCommand bibitem
47009 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47011 name "Documentation"
47012 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
47021 \begin_inset Newline newline
47025 \begin_inset Flex URL
47028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47030 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
47038 \begin_layout Bibliography
47039 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47040 LatexCommand bibitem
47046 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47048 name "Documentation"
47049 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
47053 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
47055 \begin_inset Newline newline
47059 \begin_inset Flex URL
47062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47064 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
47072 \begin_layout Bibliography
47073 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47074 LatexCommand bibitem
47080 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47082 name "Documentation"
47083 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
47087 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47093 \begin_inset Index idx
47096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47098 -packages ! caption
47104 \begin_inset Newline newline
47108 \begin_inset Flex URL
47111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47113 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
47121 \begin_layout Bibliography
47122 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47123 LatexCommand bibitem
47129 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47131 name "Documentation"
47132 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
47136 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47142 \begin_inset Index idx
47145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47147 -packages ! enumitem
47153 \begin_inset Newline newline
47157 \begin_inset Flex URL
47160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47162 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
47170 \begin_layout Bibliography
47171 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47172 LatexCommand bibitem
47178 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47180 name "Documentation"
47181 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
47185 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47191 \begin_inset Index idx
47194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47196 -packages ! fancyhdr
47202 \begin_inset Newline newline
47206 \begin_inset Flex URL
47209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47211 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
47219 \begin_layout Bibliography
47220 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47221 LatexCommand bibitem
47227 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47229 name "Documentation"
47230 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
47234 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47240 \begin_inset Index idx
47243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47245 -packages ! hyperref
47251 \begin_inset Newline newline
47255 \begin_inset Flex URL
47258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47260 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
47268 \begin_layout Bibliography
47269 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47270 LatexCommand bibitem
47276 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47278 name "Documentation"
47279 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
47283 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47289 \begin_inset Index idx
47292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47294 -packages ! nomencl
47300 \begin_inset Newline newline
47304 \begin_inset Flex URL
47307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47309 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
47317 \begin_layout Bibliography
47318 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47319 LatexCommand bibitem
47325 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47327 name "Documentation"
47328 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
47332 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47338 \begin_inset Index idx
47341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47343 -packages ! prettyref
47349 \begin_inset Newline newline
47353 \begin_inset Flex URL
47356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47358 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
47366 \begin_layout Bibliography
47367 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47368 LatexCommand bibitem
47374 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47376 name "Documentation"
47377 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
47381 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47387 \begin_inset Index idx
47390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47392 -packages ! refstyle
47398 \begin_inset Newline newline
47402 \begin_inset Flex URL
47405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47407 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
47415 \begin_layout Bibliography
47416 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47417 LatexCommand bibitem
47423 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47426 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47430 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47432 \begin_inset Newline newline
47436 \begin_inset Flex URL
47439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47441 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47449 \begin_layout Bibliography
47450 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47451 LatexCommand bibitem
47457 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47460 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47464 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47466 \begin_inset Newline newline
47470 \begin_inset Flex URL
47473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47475 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47483 \begin_layout Bibliography
47484 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47485 LatexCommand bibitem
47491 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47494 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47498 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47499 for Cyrillic languages:
47500 \begin_inset Newline newline
47504 \begin_inset Flex URL
47507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47509 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47517 \begin_layout Bibliography
47518 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47519 LatexCommand bibitem
47525 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47528 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47532 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47534 \begin_inset Newline newline
47538 \begin_inset Flex URL
47541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47543 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47551 \begin_layout Bibliography
47552 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47553 LatexCommand bibitem
47559 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47562 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47566 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47568 \begin_inset Newline newline
47572 \begin_inset Flex URL
47575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47577 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47585 \begin_layout Bibliography
47586 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47587 LatexCommand bibitem
47593 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47596 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47600 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47602 \begin_inset Newline newline
47606 \begin_inset Flex URL
47609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47611 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47619 \begin_layout Bibliography
47620 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47621 LatexCommand bibitem
47627 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47630 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47634 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47636 \begin_inset Newline newline
47640 \begin_inset Flex URL
47643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47645 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47653 \begin_layout Bibliography
47654 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47655 LatexCommand bibitem
47661 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47664 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47668 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47670 \begin_inset Newline newline
47674 \begin_inset Flex URL
47677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47679 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47687 \begin_layout Bibliography
47688 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47689 LatexCommand bibitem
47695 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47698 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47702 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47704 \begin_inset Newline newline
47708 \begin_inset Flex URL
47711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47713 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47721 \begin_layout Bibliography
47722 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47723 LatexCommand bibitem
47729 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47732 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47736 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47738 \begin_inset Newline newline
47742 \begin_inset Flex URL
47745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47747 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47755 \begin_layout Bibliography
47756 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47757 LatexCommand bibitem
47763 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47766 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47770 about new features in
47776 \begin_inset Newline newline
47780 \begin_inset Flex URL
47783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47785 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47793 \begin_layout Standard
47794 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47828 \begin_inset Note Note
47831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47838 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47839 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47840 bibliography is the second one:
47848 \begin_layout Standard
47849 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47850 LatexCommand bibtex
47851 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47852 options "biblio/alphadin"
47859 \begin_layout Standard
47860 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47864 \begin_layout Standard
47865 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47866 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47872 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47873 LatexCommand printindex